KV COM+ Library Manual

96118E
Chapter 1 Before Use
Programming
Chapter 2 Technique
Data Collection/Transfer･Monitoring Software KV-DH1LE
Property Page
Chapter 3 Setting Method
KV COM+ Library Ver. 1 Chapter 4 Property Method

Event
User's Manual Chapter 5 DLL Function
࡮Device List
࡮ Error Message Lists
Please read this Manual before use.
Keep this Manual in a safe place for later reference.
Applicable CPU Unit

Preface
This manual describes function, operation procedures, precautions, etc. of KV COM+ Library. Be sure
to carefully read and fully understand this manual before use. In addition, keep this manual in an easy-
to-reach place so that you can use it from time to time.
 Related manuals
Read the following manuals when using KV COM+ Library.
Make contact with our branch offices at the back of this manual to request those manuals.
Manual Name Description

Describes the composition/ specification, CPU internal
KV-5500/5000/3000 series
function, ladder programming method of KV-5500/5000/3000
User's Manual
series.
KV-5500/5000/3000/1000 Series
Describes various instructions available in ladder program.
Instruction Reference Manual
KV-5500/5000/3000/1000 Series Describes the script programming method and available
Script Programming Manual operators, control statements and functions, etc.
KV STUDIO
Describes how to operate KV STUDIO.
User's Manual
KV-5500/5000/3000/1000 Series Describes the system macros available for the KV-5500/5000/
System Macro Manual 3000/1000 series.
KV-1000 Series
Guide manual for the import of KV-1000.
Introduction Manual
KV-1000 series Describes the specifications, integrated functions and
User's Manual operating method of the KV-1000 PLC.
KV-1000 series Describes how to make ladder programs using the KV-1000
Programming Manual PLC, modules/macros and local devices.
KV-700 series Describes the specifications, integrated functions and
User's Manual operating method of the KV-700 PLC.
KV-700 series
Describes the instructions used in KV-700.
Instruction Reference Manual
Safety Precautions
This manual gives information on and operation procedures of KV COM+ Library.

Be sure to carefully read this manual in order to take advantages of performance and function of KV
COM+ Library.
Keep this manual in an easy-to-reach place so that you can use it from time to time.
Distribute this manual to the end users.
 Symbols
The following symbols are used to understand important matters at one view. Be sure to read below.
DANGER Failure to follow the matters described in this manual will result in death or sever injury.
WARNING Failure to follow the matters described in this manual may result in death or severe injury.
CAUTION Failure to follow the matters described in this manual may result in moderate or minor injury.
Failure to follow the matters described in this manual will cause a damage to the product
NOTICE
itself as well as other properthe’s.
Important Precautions for necessary operations.
Point Precautions for easily mistaken operations.
Reference Useful information or information that helps understanding of descriptions in this manual.
Pages or other manuals including the related information.
 General Precaution
• Proceed with care when modifying this product, or when using it in a manner that falls out of the
range indicated in its specifications, since KEYENCE is unable to guarantee device functionality or
performance in such situations.
• Use this product in combination with other devices only after careful consideration, since the product
may fail to satisfy its functionality and performance capabilities as a result of the conditions and
environment in which it is used.
• Part or all of this manual can not be used or copied without prior consent of KEYENCE.
• Information in this manual may be changed without prior notice.
• Company names and product names described in this manual are registered trademarks or
trademarks of each company.
• Microsoft, Windows, Visual Studio, Visual Basic, Visual C++, Excel, Access are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States or other respective countries.
96118E 1
Software License Agreement
By using or copying all or any portion of KV COM+ Library (hereinafter referred to as “This Software”),
you accept all the terms and conditions of this Software License Agreement (hereinafter referred to as
“This Agreement”).
1. Definition
1.1 “use” or “using” means to access, install, download, copy, or otherwise benefit from using the
functionality of This Software.
1.2 “This Software” means the software and all associated documentation provided by KEYENCE.
2. Grant of License.
2.1 As long as you comply with all of the terms and conditions of This Agreement, KEYENCE grants
to you a non-exclusive license to use This Software.
2.2 You may install This Software on a single computer (in the case of KV-DH1LE-5: 5 computers) in
order to use the products produced by KEYENCE.
3. Limitation on Copying.
3.1 You may make one copy of this software for backup purposes only.
4. Restrictions.
4.1 Other than installation of updates or new functions provided by KEYENCE, you may not modify or
add any functions to This Software.
4.2 You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble This Software.
4.3 You may not create derivative works based on This Software.
4.4 Other than expressly stated by KEYENCE, you may not resell, retransfer, rent, or otherwise
redistribute This Software to any third parties.
5. Copyright.
5.1 This Software is the property of KEYENCE. Other than expressly stated herein, This Agreement
does not grant you any intellectual property rights.
6. Disclaimer.
6.1 This Software is being delivered to you “AS IS” and KEYENCE makes no warranty as to its use or
performance. In no event will KEYENCE or its suppliers be liable to you for any damages, claims,
costs, or any lost profits caused by using This Software.
7. Termination.
7.1 This Agreement will automatically expire when you stop using This Software.
7.2 The license will terminate if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of This Agreement.
KEYENCE may terminate the license by notifying you that your continued use of This Software is
prohibited. In the event the license is terminated for any reason, you must destroy This Software
including its backup copy.
7.3 You will compensate KEYENCE for costs or any lost profits caused by your violation of This
Agreement.
8. Governing Law.
8.1 This Agreement will be governed by Japanese laws and regulations.
8.2 If any part of This Agreement is found void and unenforceable, it will not affect the validity of the
balance of This Agreement, which shall remain valid and enforceable according to its terms and
conditions.
2 - KV COM+ Library User’s Manual -

How This manual Is Organized
The chapter describes overview, operating environment

Chapter 1 Before Use and system configuration of the product.
1
The chapter describes programming technique using KV 2
Chapter 2 Programming
Technique
COM+ Library for each language supported.
3
The chapter describes how to set property pages. 4
Chapter 3 Property Page
Set value of property can be easily set on property pages.
Setting Method
5
This chapter describes properties, methods and events of A
Chapter 4 Property Method
Event
KV COM+ Library.
This chapter introduces the installation of DLL and DLL

Chapter 5 About DLL
Function
functions.
Device list, error message lists etc. are provided.

Appendices
- KV COM+ Library User’s Manual - 3

Contents
Preface ....................................................................................................................0
Safety Precautions .................................................................................................1
Software License Agreement ................................................................................2
How This manual Is Organized .............................................................................3
Contents .................................................................................................................4
Conventions Used In This Manual .....................................................................10
Terminology ......................................................................................................... 11
Symbols ............................................................................................................... 11
1 Before Use
1-1 Overview ....................................................................................................1-2
1-2 Operation Environment and System Configuration ..............................1-3
Operation Environment ......................................................................................1-3
System Configuration .........................................................................................1-4
1-3 Software Installation .................................................................................1-5
Before Installation of KV COM+ Library .............................................................1-5
Installation of KV COM+ Library .........................................................................1-6
1-4 Safety Precautions .................................................................................1-10
2 Programming Technique
2-1 Configuration and Function .....................................................................2-2
Configuration of KV COM+ Library .....................................................................2-2
How to Use KV COM+ Library ............................................................................2-5
2-2 Program Creation on Visual Studio ........................................................2-6
Use of KV COM+ Library (on Visual Basic 2005) ..............................................2-6
Program Example - Switching Operation Mode of KV Series PLC ....................2-8
Program Example - Synchronous Monitor .......................................................2-14
Program Example - Asynchronous Monitor ......................................................2-20
Program Example - Device Trigger ..................................................................2-28
Use of KV COM+ Library (When Using Visual C++) ........................................2-38
2-3 Use of KV COM+ Library on Excel ........................................................2-41
Use on a Worksheet .........................................................................................2-41
Use on User Form ............................................................................................2-43
2-4 Use of KV COM+ Library on Access .....................................................2-45
3 Property Page Setting Method

3-1 DBCommManager Control .......................................................................3-2
Comm Settings ...................................................................................................3-3
3-2 DBTriggerManager Control ......................................................................3-8
Addition of Trigger Setting ..................................................................................3-9
Device Specification .........................................................................................3-15
Change of Trigger Setting ................................................................................3-21
Deletion of Trigger Setting ................................................................................3-21
3-3 DBDeviceManager Control ....................................................................3-22
Communication manager Object ......................................................................3-23
Device ..............................................................................................................3-24
4 － KV COM+ Library User’s Manual －

Trigger ..............................................................................................................3-29
3-4 DBRTLoggingManager Control .............................................................3-31
Commanagement Object .................................................................................3-32
Device ..............................................................................................................3-33
PLC Trigger ......................................................................................................3-38
Trigger ..............................................................................................................3-40
3-5 DBCommandButton Control ..................................................................3-42
Basic .................................................................................................................3-43
3-6 DBBarMeter Control ...............................................................................3-44
Basic .................................................................................................................3-45
Display ..............................................................................................................3-46
Scale ................................................................................................................3-48
3-7 DBFanMeter Control ...............................................................................3-49
Basic .................................................................................................................3-50
Display ..............................................................................................................3-51
Scale ................................................................................................................3-53
4 Property Method Event

4-1 Lists of Properties/Methods/Events ........................................................4-2
DBCommManager Object ..................................................................................4-2
DBMemcardAccess Object ................................................................................4-3
DBDeviceManager Object ..................................................................................4-4
DBDevices Object ..............................................................................................4-5
DBDevice Object ................................................................................................4-6
DBTriggerManager Object .................................................................................4-7
DBTriggers Object ..............................................................................................4-7
DBTrigger Object ...............................................................................................4-8
DBTriggerParamInterval Object .........................................................................4-9
DBTriggerParamTimeAt Object ..........................................................................4-9
DBTriggerParamTimeSpan Object ...................................................................4-10
DBTriggerParamLogical Object ........................................................................4-10
DBTriggerParamCustom Object .......................................................................4-11
DBTriggerParamDevice Object .......................................................................4-12
DBRTLoggingManager Object .........................................................................4-13
DBRTLoggingDataCollection Structure ..........................................................4-15
DBRTLoggingDataCollection Object ................................................................4-16
DBRTLoggingData Object ................................................................................4-17
DBRTLoggingDataValue Object .......................................................................4-18
4-2 Details of Properties/Methods/Events ..................................................4-19
DBCommManager Object ................................................................................4-19
Properties ....................................................................................................4-19
Methods .......................................................................................................4-25
DBMemcardAccess Object ..............................................................................4-39
Methods .......................................................................................................4-39
DBDeviceManager Object ................................................................................4-50
Properties ....................................................................................................4-50
Methods .......................................................................................................4-54
Events .........................................................................................................4-58
DBDevices Object ............................................................................................4-63
Properties ....................................................................................................4-63
Methods .......................................................................................................4-65
DBDevice Object ..............................................................................................4-73
－ KV COM+ Library User’s Manual － 5

Properties ....................................................................................................4-73
DBTriggerManager Object ...............................................................................4-84
Properties ....................................................................................................4-84
Events .........................................................................................................4-86
DBTriggers Object ............................................................................................4-87
Properties ....................................................................................................4-87
Methods .......................................................................................................4-89
DBTrigger Object ..............................................................................................4-93
Properties ....................................................................................................4-93
Events .......................................................................................................4-104
DBTriggerParamInterval Object .....................................................................4-105
Properties ..................................................................................................4-105
DBTriggerParamTimeAt Object ......................................................................4-106
Properties ..................................................................................................4-106
DBTriggerParamTimeSpan Object .................................................................4-114
Properties ..................................................................................................4-114
DBTriggerParamLogical Object ......................................................................4-116
Properties ..................................................................................................4-116
DBTriggerParamCustom Object .....................................................................4-119
Properties ..................................................................................................4-119
Methods .....................................................................................................4-120
DBTriggerParamDevice Object ......................................................................4-121
Properties ..................................................................................................4-121
DBRTLoggingManager Object .......................................................................4-130
Properties ..................................................................................................4-130
Methods .....................................................................................................4-150
Events .......................................................................................................4-158
DBRTLoggingDataCollection Object ..............................................................4-160
Properties ..................................................................................................4-160
DBRTLoggingData Object ..............................................................................4-162
Properties ..................................................................................................4-162
DBRTLoggingDataValue Object .....................................................................4-166
Properties ..................................................................................................4-166
4-3 ActiveX Control .....................................................................................4-168
DBCommandButton Object ............................................................................4-168
DBBarMeter Object ........................................................................................4-169
DBFanMeter Object ........................................................................................4-170
Properties ..................................................................................................4-171
Methods .....................................................................................................4-183
Events .......................................................................................................4-186
4-4 Data Conversion Function ...................................................................4-187
DBValueConverterEx Object ..........................................................................4-187
Methods .....................................................................................................4-189
5 About DLL Function

5-1 Installation of DLL ....................................................................................5-2
How to Set the Path ...........................................................................................5-2
Link Setting .........................................................................................................5-2
Include File .........................................................................................................5-2
5-2 DLL Function .............................................................................................5-3
1 Constant, Type and Structure Definition .........................................................5-3
6 － KV COM+ Library User’s Manual －

2 Initialization of DataBuilder.dll .........................................................................5-8
3 Connection Control ..........................................................................................5-9
4 Operation Mode/State Control .......................................................................5-13
5 Read/Write to a Device .................................................................................5-15
6 Alarm .............................................................................................................5-41
7 Access Functions to a Memory Card ............................................................5-43
8 Other Control .................................................................................................5-54
Appendices
1 USB Driver Installation ............................................................................ A-2
Install on Windows 7/Vista ................................................................................ A-2
Install on Windows XP ....................................................................................... A-2
2 Device List ................................................................................................ A-4
3 Bit Specification of Word Device ........................................................... A-8
4 Model Change .......................................................................................... A-9
5 Error Message Lists .............................................................................. A-10
ActiveX ............................................................................................................ A-10
Each object ................................................................................................. A-10
During communication ................................................................................. A-12
Other .......................................................................................................... A-14
DLL .................................................................................................................. A-15
6 About Compatibility ............................................................................... A-20
7 Index ....................................................................................................... A-21
－ KV COM+ Library User’s Manual － 7

Conventions Used In This Manual
This section describes page components, meaning of symbols, etc.
Headline 2-6 Setting Basic Functions
Chapter title This section explains how to set the basic functions of KV COM+ for Excel.
Function Part
Monitor Mid-heading
Index for each 2
At the occurrence of a trigger (that can be set by cycle, time, device, or button), the PLC device value
is written into a set cell. It is also possible to write a cell value into a PLC device at the occurrence of
chapter
a trigger or at the confirmation of input.
Sub-heading
Setting Basic Functions
■Create a new monitor.

1 Select a cell (range) where to set the monitor.
Reference A cell (range) can also be specified at "Object Cell" in the Set Monitor dialog box. Procedures
2 From the menu, select "Add-in" "KV COM+(K)" -> "Set Basic Function (F)" -> "New Monitor (M)".
Other procedure Different procedure
Reference
Describes the Click .
Open the right-click menu and click "Create Monitor".
information.
operations The Set Monitor screen is displayed.
3 Click the Set Device tab. Shows points for

corresponding to menu Set a object cell range and also a monitoring device and its display.
4 better understanding
operations in procedure Select a device type and enter a device number.
of the text and useful

Page or manual to "Appendices: Device List" (Page App-7) information.
5
refer to. Set a device name display position.
Operation dialog box

The page or manual
containing the related Point
When "Object Cell" is specified by a range, the settable items are limited. Note
information is Shows easily
Example
indicated here. If a cell range is specified in the column direction, "Above" and "Below" cannot be set.
mistaken operations.
Be sure to read
Examples. carefully.
2-26 - KV COM+ for Excel User’s Manual -
* KV COM+ for Excel User’ s Manual is used as an example.

Terminology
This manual uses the following terminology excluding some instances.
Term Description
Refers to the overall system of a programmable logic controller; it contains a base
PLC unit and CPU unit with each units mounted. The word PLC here represents the
overall system.
PC Stands for personal computer.
KV STUDIO Indicates KV STUDIO Ladder Support Software.
Ladder program Indicates programs compiled with KV STUDIO Ladder support software.
Symbols
Menus and buttons in this manual are indicated using the following marks and symbols.
Symbol Description
[ ] Menu item, which can be selected from menu.
" " - Name of dialog box or item.
- Buttons with text description on dialog box in various operations (such as performing
and canceling).
Ctrl CTRL key on keyboard.
- KV COM+ Library User’s Manual - 9

MEMO

1
Before Use
Before Use 1
The chapter includes overview, operating environment and system

configuration of the product.
1-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

1-2 Operation Environment and System Configuration .1-3
1-3 Software Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
1-4 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
- KV COM+ Library User’s Manual - 1-1

1-1 Overview
Before Use
KV COM+ Library supports ActiveX control* which makes it easier to handle PLC information with user
applications including Microstate Excel.
Since most properties can be easily set on property pages not requiring complex communication
programs, the coding amount is significantly reduced. KV COM+ Library is the most suitable for
1 programmers who want to create original programs to deal with PLC information or who are not
satisfied with KV COM+ for Excel.
Overview
*) ActiveX control: ActiveX is a technology developed by Microsoft, enables components of different

software to use together. Those components are called ActiveX controls.
PC
User application Microsoft Excel
KV COM+ Library
KV-5000
KV STUDIO
simulator Communication
Serial, USB, Ethernet

Bluetooth, Routing setting
1-2 - KV COM+ Library User’s Manual -

1-2 Operation Environment and System Configuration
Before Use
This section describes operation environment and system configuration of KV COM+ Library.
Operation Environment
1
The following environment is required for operation of KV COM+ Library.
Operation Environment and System Configuration

Make sure that using your system meets the following conditions and has the required devices.
Computer system supported
Computer installed with Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows 7 or Windows Vista, equipped with
RS-232C or USB interface.
CD-ROM drive
CPU
Windows XP/2000: Pentium 800MHz or more
(Pentium 1GHz or more recommended)
Windows 7/Vista: Processor recommended by Microsoft Corporation.
Memory capacity
Windows XP/2000: Expanded memory 256 MB or more (512 MB or more
recommended)
Windows 7/Vista: Memory recommended by Microsoft Corporation.
Applicable OS
• Windows XP
• Windows 2000 (SP3 or more)
• Windows Vista (Not included 64-bit version)
• Windows 7
(Only English operation system)
Supported languages
Microsoft Visual Basic Visual Basic 2010/2008/2005, Visual Basic.NET 2003,
Visual Basic 6.0
Microsoft Visual C++ Visual C++ 2010/2008/2005, Visual C++.NET 2003,
Visual C++ 6.0
Microsoft Office Excel2010/2007/2003/2002/2000
Microsoft Office Access2010/2007/2003/2002/2000
VBScript*1
*1. Only DBCommManager supported.
Free Space Available on Hard Disk
200M bytes or more
《PLC》
KV COM+ Library supports the following PLC.
• KV-5500
• KV-5000
• KV-3000
• KV-1000
• KV-700

1-2 Operation Environment and System Configuration
Before Use
System Configuration
1
Operation Environment and System Configuration
KV-5000 Routing setting (FL-net)

KV-5000/KV-FL20V
VT3 series
Routing setting (VT/DT)
KV-3000/1000/700/L20V
Ethernet switch
Ethernet connection
(STP/UTP straight cable)
Ethernet connection
(STP/UTP straight cable)
Ethernet connection
(STP/UTP cross cable)
Serial connection
㧔RS-232C‫ޔ‬RS-422A㧕
Ethernet KV-5500/5000/LE20V/LE21V/EP21V
Routing setting (FL-net) KV-5000/KV-FL20V
(VT/DT) KV-3000/1000/700/L20V
Bluetooth USB connection
(EtherNet/IP) KV-5500/KV-EP21V
connection
Serial KV-3000/1000/700/L20V
USB KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700
Bluetooth KV-5500/5000*1/3000 (Ver.2 above)
(* For 1 KV-5000, Ver.1.1 above)

1-3 Software Installation
Before Use
This section explains installation and uninstallation of KV COM+ Library.
“KV COM+ Library installation CD” also includes both ActiveX and DLL.
Before Installation of KV COM+ Library 1
Software Installation
Check the following items before starting the installation of KV COM+ Library.
● Free Space Available on Hard Disk

KV COM+ Library can be installed only on hard disks. Fee space of 200M bytes shall be necessary on
the hard disk to be installed. If there is not enough free space, clean up the hard disk so that there is
enough space.
● Windows Environment and Installation Directory

KV COM+ Library should be installed and operated on Windows.
Make sure that Windows 7/Vista/XP/2000 are installed and are running normally on the PC when in
use.
● Serial port (RS-232C)

To connect device with RS-232C, serial port on the PC must be able to detect the device. For setting
details, refer to the PC manual.
● USB Port
To connect each device with USB, USB port on the PC must be able to detect the device. For setting
USB connection requires USB driver for each connected device.
"USB Driver Installation"（A-2 page）
● Ethernet Port
details, refer to the PC manual or ask your network administrator.
● Bluetooth

Before Use
Installation of KV COM+ Library
This section describes how to install KV COM+ Library on Windows 7 with the following drive
1 1
configuration.
Turn on the computer to activate Windows.

Point • Shut down all other software running on the PC before starting installation. If antivirus
software is running, installation may take more time.
• Only the administrator, users with rights to change the system, can install this software;
administrator login is necessary.
2 Place “KV COM+ Library installation CD” in the CD-ROM drive on the PC.
“KV COM+ Library installation CD” starts automatically due to automatic execution system. If the
installation program is automatically activated, go to step 5. If not, go to step 3.
3 Click “Start” button and enter “e:\setup” in the search box.

The search result list comes up.
4 Click “setup” on the list.

Installation program is activated.

Before Use
Progress bar shows preparation progress for setup.
6 When the next dialog box is displayed, click “Next (N)” button. To cancel setup, click “Cancel”
button.
7 When the next dialog box is displayed, read the software licensing. If you agree, click the radio
button for “I accept the terms in the license agreement” and click “Next (N)” button.

8
Before Use
Enter user name, Organization, Serial Number and click "Next (N)" button.
The serial number is on "License certificate" included in the package.
1
9 Confirm drive name and folder (directory) name to be installed.

"C:\Program Files\KEYENCE\KVComPlusLB" is specified as the installation destination by default. To
install the program to the destination displayed, click "Next (N)" button.
To change the installation destination, click "Change" button to specify drive name and folder (directory)
name.
10 When the next dialog box is displayed, click "Install" button. To quit setup, click "Cancel"
button.

11 When setup is finished successfully, a message comes up to indicate the end of the setup
Before Use
procedure.
Click "Finish" button to finish installation.

1-4 Safety Precautions
Before Use
This section describes the notes when using KV COM+ Library. Be sure to read carefully.
● Interface of PC
Make sure that devices connected to serial, USB, Ethernet port or Bluetooth is detected by the PC. If
1 not set properly, devices do not work. For setting details, refer to the PC manual.
● Precautions during communication

Safety Precautions
During communication, do not turn off the connected devices or pull the connection cable out to avoid
communications errors.
● Precautions when using USB

For USB connection, USB must be directly connected to the USB port of the device without using USB
hub. Communications may be disrupted since noise or other factors may cause unstable
communications. If communication is disrupted, pull out and re-insert the USB cable. To avoid frequent
interruption of communication, attach a ferrite bead to the connection cable.
● Precautions for long time use

Duplicate data with 2 PCs to archive significant data reliability.
● Precautions for the rights upon use

When using KV COM+ Library, assign "Power User" or higher authority for users using KV COM+
Library.

Programming Technique
2
Programming Technique 2
The chapter includes programming technique when using KV COM+ Library

for each language supported.
2-1 Configuration and Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2

2-2 Program Creation on Visual Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
2-3 Use of KV COM+ Library on Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
2-4 Use of KV COM+ Library on Access . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45

2-1 Configuration and Function
This section describes the overview of configuration and function of KV COM+ Library as well as how to
use KV COM+ Library.
Configuration of KV COM+ Library
2 KV COM+ Library supports ActiveX control which makes it possible easy handling of information in
PLCs through communication with KV series PLC, is composed of 7 control objects and has other 15
objects.
Configuration and Function
DATABUILDERAXLibLB
Management Reference
DBTriggerManager
DBMemcardAccess DBCommManager DBDeviceManager
Management
Management Reference
DBTriggers
DBDevices
Creation/
Management
Creation/Management Reference
DBRTLoggingManager DBTrigger
DBDevice
Reference Creation/
Management Management
DBRTLoggingDataCollection DBTriggerParamInterval
Management
DBTriggerParamTimeAt
DBRTLoggingData
Management DBTriggerParamTimeSpan
DBRTLoggingDataValue
DBTriggerParamLogical
DBTriggerParamCustom
DBTriggerParamDevice
Memory card Communication Real time logging

management management Device management management Trigger management
Data Conversion
DBValueConverterEx
ActiveX Control
DBCommandButton
DBBarMeter
DBFanMeter

 Function of Each Control Object
KV COM+ Library has 7 control objects; "DBCommManager", "DBDeviceManager",
"DBTriggerManager", "DBRTLoggingManager", "DBCommandButton", "DBBarMeter" and
"DBFanMeter".
The following is the main features of each object:
Control name Function

Manages communication with the connected device. Synchronous read and
2
write operation is possible. Unable to proceed to next processing until

“DBCommManager” completing the current processing, however, it is easy to handle in
programming.
"DBCommManager Object"（4-2 page）
Manages device information for butch read and write at arbitrary timing.
Reads and writes data asynchronously, resulting in complex handling on
“DBDeviceManager” programming while reducing burden of application.
"DBDeviceManager Object"（4-4 page）
Manages trigger information which determines the timing of arbitrary order
behavior. Able to set triggers of either cycle, time, time range or combination
“DBTriggerManager” of those triggers.
"DBTriggerManager Object"（4-7 page）
Manages device information and trigger information that use real time
logging. Able to collect data with less without losing while communicating
“DBRTLoggingManager” due to data buffer inside PLC. (PLC supported: KV-5500/5000/3000)
"DBRTLoggingManager Object"（4-13 page）
Controls switch, lump switch, lump, N status lump by using ActiveX control.
“DBCommandButton”
"DBCommandButton Object"（4-168 page）
Controls bar-type meter by using ActiveX control.
“DBBarMeter”
"DBBarMeter Object"（4-169 page）
Controls Circle meter or Sector meter by using ActiveX control.
“DBFanMeter”
"DBFanMeter Object"（4-170 page）

 Function of Each Object

KV COM+ Library has 15 objects other than 7 control objects.
Since these objects can be easily set on the property page, you do not have to concern about those
functions under normal conditions.
Object name Function

Represents DBDevice collection
2 “DBDevices” Creates/manages DBDevice object
"DBDevices Object"（4-5 page）
Represents device for asynchronous read and write
“DBDevice”
"DBDevice Object"（4-6 page）
Represents DBTrigger collection
“DBTriggers” Creates/manages DBTrigger object.
"DBTriggers Object"（4-7 page）
Represents triggers
Creates/manages the following trigger condition objects:
DBTriggerParamTimeSpan
“DBTrigger” DBTriggerParamCustom
DBTriggerParamInterval
"DBTrigger Object"（4-8 page）
Represents trigger conditions. Able to set 6 types of cycle, time, time
“DBTriggerParamInterval” range, device combination and custom.
“DBTriggerParamTimeAt” "DBTriggerParamInterval Object"（4-9 page）
“DBTriggerParamTimeSpan” "DBTriggerParamTimeAt Object"（4-9 page）
“DBTriggerParamDevice” "DBTriggerParamTimeSpan Object"（4-10 page）
“DBTriggerParamLogical” "DBTriggerParamDevice Object"（4-12 page）
“DBTriggerParamCustom” "DBTriggerParamLogical Object"（4-10 page）
"DBTriggerParamCustom Object"（4-11 page）
Represents access to memory card. Manages files in the memory card.
“DBMemcardAccess”
"DBMemcardAccess Object"（4-39 page）
“DBRTLoggingDataCollection” Manages data acquired by real time logging
“DBRTLoggingData” "DBRTLoggingDataCollection Object"（4-160 page）
"DBRTLoggingData Object"（4-162 page）
“DBRTLoggingDataValue” "DBRTLoggingDataValue Object"（4-166 page）
Executes mutual conversion of data for character string type and value
“DBValueConverterEx” type.
"DBValueConverterEx Object"（4-187 page）

How to Use KV COM+ Library
KV COM+ Library enables PLC information handling with DBCommManager control alone. For
handling of multiple nonsequential devices or read and write at more complex timing, combination of
DBDeviceManager control and DBTriggerManager control is used.
 Single Use of DBCommManager Control

PLC information is handled only by DBCommManager control. Upon read and write on the device,
2
processing proceeds one by one. However, handling on programming is easy. Select single use to read

and write on single device or sequential devices at simple timing.
Connected
DBCommManager
device
"Program Example - Switching Operation Mode of KV Series PLC"（2-8 page）

"Program Example - Synchronous Monitor"（2-14 page）
 Use of 4 Combined Controls

For batch handling of multiple devices, DBDeviceManager control and DBCommManager control
works together. Asynchronous read and write of data makes handling on programming more complex
but reduces burden of applications. Using the combination of DBRTLoggingManager control and
DBCommManager for batch handling of multiple devices makes programming more complex but
reduces data lost by communication because logging data buffered in PLC can be acquired.
DBTriggerManager control sets trigger conditions to read and write on the device. Select combination
of 4 controls to handle multiple nonsequential devices or read and write at more complex timing.
KV COM+ ActiveX control
Reference
DBDeviceManager DBTriggerManager
DBRTLoggingManager
Reference
Connected
DBCommManager
device
Communication
"Program Example - Asynchronous Monitor"（2-20 page）

"Program Example - Device Trigger"（2-28 page）

2-2 Program Creation on Visual Studio
This section describes how to create program on Visual Studio using KV COM+ Library.
Use of KV COM+ Library (on Visual Basic 2005)
Following is procedure to make KV COM+ Library available on Visual Basic:

2 1 Start up Visual Basic.
Program Creation on Visual Studio
2 Select “File (F)” -> "New Project (P)" from the menu bar to display "New project" dialog box.
3 Select "Windows Forms Application" and click "OK" button to create a new project.
4 Select "Tools (T)" -> "Choose Toolbox item (X)" from the menu bar.
Click COM components tab to open. Select an item, then click "Browse (B)" button.

5 Check the following items from COM component as necessary and click "OK" button.
• DBCommManager Class (Library)

• DBDeviceManager Class (Library)
• DBTriggerManager Class (Library)
• DBRTLoggingManager Class (Library)
•
•
DBCommandButton Control (Library)
DBBarMeter Control (Library)
2
• DBFanMeter Control (Library)

If the item is successfully added, a component is shown in the tool box window.
6 Select control of KV COM+ Library to be used.
7 Drag the selected control on the form.

ActiveX control is created on the form.

Program Example - Switching Operation Mode of KV Series PLC
This program switches operation mode of KV-5000. Upon starting the program, KV-5000 is connected
to the PC and operation mode of acquired KV-5000 is reflected on the option button.
2
RUN switch PROGRAM switch

Switches to RUN. Switches to
PROGRAM mode.
Point • Select RUN switch here to proceed to next procedure.

 Procedures to Create Program
1 Create a new project.

2 Allocate AxDBCommManager Class control.
3 Allocate the first RadioButton control.
4 Allocate the second RadioButton control.
2

(1) Create a new project and configure KV COM+ Library available.

"Use of KV COM+ Library (on Visual Basic 2005)"（2-6 page）
(1) Allocate AxDBCommManager Class control on a form of the project and select the control to
create "AxDBCommManager1".
(2) Set "PLC" (Connection model) in the property window of "AxDBCommManager1".

Select "KV-5500/5000/3000".
"PLC"（4-19 page）

(3) Click "Property page" button on the property window of "AxDBCommManager1". "Property
page" dialog box comes up.
"Property page" button
2 (4) Click "Settings" button to display "Communication setting" dialog box.

(5) Select communication setting. Select "USB" here.

"Comm Settings"（3-3 page）
(6) To edit the configuration of the form, select "View (V)" -> "Code (C)" from the menu.
Other procedure
Double-click the form to display a code window.

(7) Write the following code in "Form_Load" procedure.
Detail: To start communication with KV-5000 upon the start of the program.
"Connect"（4-26 page）
Private Sub Form1_Load(ByVal sender As System.Object, ByVal e As System.EventArgs) _

Handles MyBase.Load
AxDBCommManager1.Connect() ' Start communication.
End Sub
2
3 Allocate the first RadioButton control.

(1) Allocate RadioButton control on the form to create "RadioButton1".
(2) Change "Text" on the property window from "RadioButton1" to "RUN".
(3) To edit the text "RadioButton1", select "View (V)" -> "Code (C)" from the menu.
Other procedure
Double-click "RadioButton1" to display the code window.
(4) Write the following code in "RadioButton1_Click" procedure.

Details: To click "RadioButton1" to change the mode of KV-5000 to RUN mode.
"SetMode"（4-29 page）
Private Sub RadioButton1_Click(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As System.EventArgs) _

Handles RadioButton1.Click
AxDBCommManager1.SetMode(True) 'Switch to RUN mode.
End Sub

4 Allocate the second RadioButton control.
(1) Create "RadioButton2" and change "Text" to "PROGRAM" as described in the procedure above.
(2) Write the following code in "RadioButton2_Click" procedure.

Details: To click "RadioButton2" to change the mode of KV-5000 to PROGRAM mode.
2 Private Sub RadioButton2_Click(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As System.EventArgs) _

Handles RadioButton2.Click
AxDBCommManager1.SetMode(False) 'Switch to PROGRAM mode.
End Sub
(3) Add the following code to "Form_Load" procedure.

Details: To reflect the current operation mode of KV-5000 to option toolbar upon the start of the
program.
"GetMode"（4-28 page）
Private Sub Form1_Load(ByVal sender As System.Object, ByVal e As System.EventArgs) Handles _

MyBase.Load
If AxDBCommManager1.GetMode Then
RadioButton1.Checked = True
Else
End If
End Sub
 Code
MyBase.Load
Else
End If
End Sub
Private Sub RadioButton1_Click(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As System.EventArgs) Handles _

RadioButton1.Click
AxDBCommManager1.SetMode(True) 'Switch to RUN mode.
End Sub

RadioButton2.Click
AxDBCommManager1.SetMode(False) 'Switch to PROGRAM
End Sub

To create with Visual C++ (Switching PLC operation mode)
// Start communication with PLC.

BOOL CDialog::OnInitDialog()
{
// TODO: Add initialization here.
CDBCommManager1.Connect();
if (CDBCommManager1.GetMode()) {
m_rdBtn1.SetCheck(true);
} else { 2
m_rdBtn2.SetCheck(false);

}
UpdateData();
return TRUE;
}
// Change operation mode to RUN.
void CTestDlg::OnBnClickedRadio1()
{
CDBCommManager1.SetMode(true);
}
// Change operation mode to PROGRAM.
void CTestDlg::OnBnClickedRadio2()
{
CDBCommManager1.SetMode(false);
}
// Stop communication with PLC.
void CTestDlg::OnBnClickedOk()
{
CDBCommManager1.Disconnect();
OnOK();
}

Program Example - Synchronous Monitor
This program reads device values at each click of the “Read” button.
It also writes input values at each click of the “Write” button.
2
Device value display "Write" button

Displays device value. Writes device values in
"Read" button the device value
Reads device values from PLC and display into PLC.
displays the device values in the
device value display.

 Program Creation Procedure

3 Allocate TextBox control.
4
5
Allocate Label control.
Allocate the first Button control.
2
6

Allocate the second Button control.

(2) Set "PLC" (connection model) on the property window of "AxDBCommManager1".

Select "KV-5500/5000/3000".

(3) Click "Property page" button on the property window of "AxDBCommManager1". "Property"
dialog box comes up.
(4) Click "Settings" button to display "Communication setting" dialog box.

2
(5) Select communication setting. Set "USB" here.

Other procedure
Double-click the form to display the code window.

Details: To start communication with the connected device while running the program.

Handles MyBase.Load
End Sub

(1) Allocate TextBox control on the form to create "TextBox1".

4 Allocate Label control.
(1) Allocate Label control on the form and change "Text" to "DM0".
5 Allocate the first Button control.
(1) Allocate Button control on the form to create "Button1".
(2) Change "Button1" to "Read".
(3) To edit the text "Button1", select "View (V)" -> "Code (C)" from the menu.
Other procedure
Double-click "Button1" to open the code window.
(4) Write the following code in "Button1_Click" procedure.

Details: To click Button1 to read DM0 value and display it in TextBox1.
"ReadDevice"（4-32 page）

Private Sub Button1_Click(ByVal sender As System.Object, ByVal e As System.EventArgs) _

Handles Button1.Click
TextBox1.Text = AxDBCommManager1.ReadDevice _
(DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBPlcDevice.DKV5000_DM, "0")
End Sub
6 Allocate the second Button control.

2 (1) Allocate Button control on the form to create "Button2".
(2) Change "Button2" to "Write".
(3) To edit the text of "Button2", select "View (V)" -> "Code (C)" from the menu.
Other procedure
Double-click "Button2" to display a code window.
(4) Write the following code in "Button2_Click" procedure.

Detail: Click Button2 to write the value input in TextBox1into DM0.
"WriteDevice"（4-36 page）
Private Sub Button2_Click(ByVal sender As System.Object, ByVal e As _

System.EventArgs) Handles Button2.Click
AxDBCommManager1.WriteDevice(DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBPlcDevice.DKV5000_DM, _
"0", CLng(TextBox1.Text))
End Sub
 Code
MyBase.Load
End Sub

Private Sub Button1_Click(ByVal sender As System.Object, ByVal e As System.EventArgs) Handles _
Button1.Click
TextBox1.Text = AxDBCommManager1.ReadDevice _
End Sub

Button2.Click 2

AxDBCommManager1.WriteDevice(DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBPlcDevice.DKV5000_DM, "0", _
CLng(TextBox1.Text))
End Sub

Program Example - Asynchronous Monitor
This program reads device values at the cycle of 50ms.
2 Device value display

Displays device value.


3 Allocate AxDBTriggerManager Class control.
4 Allocate AxDBDeviceManager Class control.
2



Select "KV-5500/5000/3000".

(3) Click "Property page" button on the property window of "AxDBCommManager1". "Property"
dialog box comes up..
(4) Click "Settings" button to display "Communication setting" dialog box.

2
(5) Select communication setting. Select "USB" here.

Other procedure
Double-click the form to open the code window.

Detail: To start communication with the connected device while running the program.

Handles MyBase.Load
End Sub

(1) Allocate AxDBTriggerManager Class control on a form of the project and select the control to
create "AxDBTriggerManager1".

(2) Click "Property page" button on the property window of "AxDBTriggerManager1". "Property"
(3) Click "Add" button to display "Trigger setting" dialog box.
(4) Set a trigger period as shown below and click "Finish" button.
"Trigger setting for period"（3-10 page）
→ →
The current dialog box is closed and "Property" dialog box comes up. Set trigger is displayed on the list.
(5) Click "Close" button to close "Property" dialog box.


Detail: To enable a trigger while running the program.
「DBCommManager.Active」（4-24 page）

Handles MyBase.Load
2 AxDBTriggerManager1.Active = True ' Enable trigger.
End Sub
4 Allocate AxDBDeviceManager Class control.
(1) Allocate AxDBDeviceManager Class control on a form of the project to create

"AxDBDeviceManager1".
(2) Click "Property page" button on the property window of "AxDBDeviceManager1". "Property"
(3) Select communication management object (DBCommManager) to refer to a drop-down list of

"Communication Target". Select "AxDBDeviceManager1" here.
(4) Click "Device" tab.
(5) Click "Add" button. "Device setting" dialog box comes up..

(6) Set values as shown below and click "OK" button.
Point Specify data memory for word processing.

"Device setting" dialog box is closed and the device is added to the "Property" dialog box.
(7) Click "Trigger" tab.
(8) Select trigger setting at the time of read from a drop-down list of "Read Trigger". Select
"AxDBTriggerManager1.Trigger1" here.

(1) Allocate TextBox control on a form of the project to create "TextBox1".
2
(2) Right-click on "TextBox1" to display the short cut menu.
(3) Select and click "Copy".

(4) Right-click the arbitrary point on the form to display the short cut menu.
(5) Select and Click "Paste"
(6) "TextBox2" is created.

(7) Repeat the procedures from 4 to 6 to create "TextBox3" and "TextBox4".

(1) Allocate Label control on a form of the project and change “Text” to “DM0”, “DM1”, “DM2”,
“DM3”.

(2) Write the following code in "AxDBDeviceManager1_AfterRead" procedure.
Detail: To display the device values read from PLC in the text box.
"AfterRead"（4-59 page）
"ValueRead"（4-75 page）
Private Sub AxDBDeviceManager1_AfterRead(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As System.EventArgs) _

Handles AxDBDeviceManager1.AfterRead
TextBox1.Text = AxDBDeviceManager1.Devices(1).ValueRead
End Sub
 Code
MyBase.Load
AxDBTriggerManager1.Active = True ' Enable trigger.

End Sub

End Sub

Program Example - Device Trigger
This program reads and displays device values while CR2006 (1 second clockpulse) of KV-5000 is ON.
The program does not read the values while CR2006 is OFF.
2
Device value display
Displays device values.


4
5
Allocate the first AxDBDeviceManager Class control.
Allocate TextBox control.
2

7 Allocate the second AxDBDeviceManager Class
control.


Select "KV-5500/5000/3000".

(3) Click "Property page" button in the property window of "AxDBCommManager1". "Property"
(4) Click "Setup" button to display "Communication setting" dialog box.

2
(5) Set communication setting. Select "USB" here.

Other procedure
Double-click the form to open the code window.

Details: To start communication with the connected device while running the program.

Handles MyBase.Load
End Sub

(1) Allocate AxDBTriggerManager Class control on a form of the project and select the control to
create "AxDBTriggerManager1".

(2) Click "Property page" button on the property window of "AxDBTriggerManager1"."Property"
(4) Set a trigger as shown below and click "Finish" button.

→ →
(6) Set a trigger as shown below and click "Finish" button.

"Set any trigger"（3-20 page）

→ →
"Trigger setting" dialog box is closed and go back to "Property" dialog box. The trigger is displayed in
2 the list.

Details: To enable trigger while running the program.
「DBCommManager.Active」（4-24 page）

Handles MyBase.Load
End Sub

4 Allocate the first AxDBDeviceManager Class control.
(1) Allocate AxDBDeviceManager Class control on a form of the project and select the control to
create "AxDBDeviceManager1".

(2) Click "Property page" button on the property window of "AxDBDeviceManager1". "Property"
(3) Select communication management object (DBCommManager) to refer to "Communication

Target" list. Select "AxDBCommManager1" here.
(5) Click "Add" button. "Device setting" dialog box comes up.
Point Specify data memory for word processing.

"Device setting" dialog box is closed and the device is added to the list on the "Property" dialog box.
2
(7) Click "Trigger" tab.
(8) Select trigger setting at the time of reading from "Read Trigger" list. Select
"AxDBTriggerManager1.Trigger2" here.
(1) Allocte TextBox control on a form of the project to create "TextBox1".
(2) Right-click "TextBox1" to display the short cut menu.

(3) Select and click "Copy".
(4) Right-click the arbitrary point on the form to display the short cut menu.

(5) Select and click "Paste".

(6) Click "Yes" button to create "TextBox2".
(7) Repeat the procedure from 4 to 6 to create "TextBox3" and "TextBox4".
(1) Allocate Label control on the form and change “Text” to “DM0”, “DM1”, “DM2”, “DM3”.

Details: To display device values read from PLC in the text box.
"AfterRead"（4-59 page）
"ValueRead"（4-75 page）

End Sub

7 Allocate the second AxDBDeviceManager Class control.
(1) Allocate AxDBDeviceManager Class control on a form of the project and select the control to
create "AxDBDeviceManager2".
2
(2) Click "Property page" button on the property window of "AxDBDeviceManager2" to display
"Property" dialog box.
(3) Select communication management object (DBCommManager) to refer to "Communication

Target" list.
Select "AxDBCommManager1" here.
(5) Click "Add" button to display "Device setting" dialog box.

"Device setting" dialog box is closed and the device is added to the list on "Property" dialog box.
2
(7) Double-click "Trigger" tab.

(8) Select a read trigger from "Read Trigger" list.
Select "AxDBTriggerManager1.Trigger1" here.

Details: When the device value read from PLC is ON, set custom trigger ON.
"SetState"（4-120 page）
Private Sub DBDeviceManager2_AfterRead(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As System.EventArgs) _

If AxDBDeviceManager2.Devices(1).ValueRead = 1 Then
AxDBTriggerManager1.Triggers(2).AsCustom.SetState(True)
End If
End Sub
 Code
MyBase.Load
End Sub

End Sub
Private Sub DBDeviceManager2_AfterRead(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As System.EventArgs) _

If AxDBDeviceManager2.Devices(1).ValueRead = 1 Then
AxDBTriggerManager1.Triggers(2).AsCustom.SetState(True)
End If
End Sub

Use of KV COM+ Library (When Using Visual C++)
This section describes the procedures to make KV COM+ Library available on Visual C++.
1 Start up Visual C++.
2 2 Select "File (F)" -> "New project (P)" from the menu bar. "New project" dialog box comes up.
3 Select "Windows Form Application" and click "OK" button to Create a new project.
4 Select "View (V)" -> "Toolbox (X)" to display "Toolbox window".

Right-click component of Toolbox window and select "Choose item (I)". "Selection of toolbox item"

5 Select "COM component" tab to display "Browse" dialog box.
6 Check the following items from COM component as necessary and click "OK" button.
• DBCommManager Class (Library)

• DBDeviceManager Class (Library)
• DBTriggerManager Class (Library)
• DBRTLoggingManager Class (Library)
• DBCommandButton Control (Library)
• DBBarMeter Control (Library)
• DBFanMeter Control (Library)
When items are successfully added, component is shown in the toolbox window.
7 Select control of KV COM+ Library to be used.

8 Drag the control on the form to create control of KV COM+ Library.
2
Point Visual C++ does not enable you to associate property connection targets and triggers. Use
code to set an association.
//Associate DBCommManager1 with DBDeviceManager1

IUnknown* pUnk = DBCommManager1.GetControlUnknown();
LPDISPATCH pCommManager = NULL;
pUnk->QueryInterface(IID_IDispatch, (void**)&pCommManager);
DBDeviceManager1.putref_CommManager(pCommManager);

2-3 Use of KV COM+ Library on Excel
This section describes how to use KV COM+ Library on Excel.
Use on a Worksheet
This section describes the procedure to make KV COM+ Library available on a worksheet of Excel.
1 Start up Microsoft Excel. 2
Use of KV COM+ Library on Excel

2 Select "Developer" -> "Insert" from the menu bar to display control toolbox.
3 Click "Select control" button ( ) to display the control list.

4 Select control of KV COM+ Library to be used and click "OK" button.
2
5 Drag the control on the sheet. The control of KV COM+ Library is created as shown below.

Use on User Form
This section describes the procedure to make KV COM+ Library available on a user form of Excel.
1 Start up Microsoft Excel.
2 Select "Developer" -> "Visual Basic" from the menu bar to open Microsoft Visual Basic Editor. 2

3 Select "Insert (I)" -> "User form (U)" from the menu bar to create a user form.
4 Select "Tool (T)" -> "Other control (A)" from the menu bar.
Other procedure
Right-click a toolbox and select "Additional control (A)" to display "Additional control" dialog box.
5 Check “DBCommManager Class”, “DBDeviceManager Class”, “DBRTLoggingManager Class”,

“DBTriggerManager Class”, “DBCommandButton Control”, “DBBarMeter Control” and
“DBFanMeter Control”.

6 Click “OK” button to add control of KV COM+ Library of “DBCommManager Class”,

“DBDeviceManager Class”, “DBRTLoggingManager Class”, “DBTriggerManager Class”,
“DBCommandButton Control”, “DBBarMeter Control”, “DBFanMeter Control" in the toolbox.
7 Click an icon for control of KV COM+ Library to be used.
2
8 Drag the control on the form to create control of KV COM+ Library on the form.

2-4 Use of KV COM+ Library on Access
This section describes how to use KV COM+ Library on Microsoft Access.
This section describes the procedure to make KV COM+ Library available on user form of Access.
1 Start up Microsoft Access.
2 Select "Design" -> "ActiveX control" from the menu bar to display "Insert ActiveX control"
2
dialog box.
Use of KV COM+ Library on Access

3 Select control of KV COM+ Library to be used and click "OK" button to create control of KV
COM+ Library on the form.
Access does not enable you to associate property connection targets and triggers. Use VBA code to
set an association.
'Example of association with CommManager of DBCommManager

Set DBDeviceManager1.CommManager = DBCommManager0.Object

2-4 Use of KV COM+ Library on Access
MEMO
2
Use of KV COM+ Library on Access

3
Property Page Setting Method

Property Page Setting
Method 3
The chapter includes how to set property pages.

Set value of property can be easily set on property pages.
3-1 DBCommManager Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2

3-2 DBTriggerManager Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
3-3 DBDeviceManager Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
3-4 DBRTLoggingManager Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
3-5 DBCommandButton Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42
3-6 DBBarMeter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
3-7 DBFanMeter Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49

3-1 DBCommManager Control
This section describes how to set the property page of DBCommManager control. The communication
with device to be connected is set in this section.
Communication setting is displayed. "Settings" button

"Communication setting" dialog box
is displayed. Connection method is
selected from serial, Ethernet,
Bluetooth, routing setting, USB for
specific communication setting.
3
DBCommManager Control
"Apply" button
Determines "Communication
setting".
"OK" button "Cancel" button
Determines "Communication Closes the dialog box without determining
setting" and closes the dialog box. "Communication setting".
Reference The following property can be set on the property page of DBCommManager object.
DBCommManager object
Property name Reference page
Peer 4-21
Point Set connection model setting (PLC property) in the "Property" window of
DBCommManager object.
Reference When changing connection model with already set device existing, the device is
automatically changed to the model after the setting.
"Model Change"（A-9 page）


Comm Settings
This section describes how to operate "Comm settings" dialog box.
1 Click "Setup" button on "Property page" dialog box to display "Comm settings" dialog box.
2 Select a "PC comm port" from "USB", "Serial", "Ethernet", "Bluetooth".

Selected communication setting is displayed in the lower part of the dialog box.
Point "Modem" mode cannot be used.
3 Configure "Communication setting".

When "Serial" is selected, items shown below are displayed in the communication setting area.
(To use KV-5500/5000, serial communication unit is required.)

Item Description
Selects a COM port for the connection cable. The default is "COM1". COM port is a
COM port serial port; communication is through RS-232C interface. The COM port Nos. are
displayed according to the PC model.
Selects baud rate. The selection range and default values for baud rate are shown
as follows.
Model Selection range Default

Baud rate
KV-5500*、KV-5000* 9600、19200、38400、57600、 115200
3 KV-3000、KV-1000
KV-700
115200
9600、19200、38400、57600 57600
Unit No. “Unit No.” setting dialog box comes up when “Unit No.” setting button is clicked.
* Serial communication unit KV- L20V is required to connect KV-5500/5000 by serial connection.
• Unit No. setting

With KV STUDIO, you can specify multiple KV-L20V/R station Nos. in multi-station configuration; with
1 PC, you can transfer a ladder program to multiple KV-5500/3000/1000/700 PLCs and to monitor.
When selecting "Ethernet"

(Connecting KV-3000/1000/700 using Ethernet requires KV-LE21V/KV-LE20V/KV-EP21V separately.)
Item Description
IP Address Enters the IP address for connecting KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 PLC.
(Search destination) Searches for the KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 connected to Ethernet.
Port No. Enters the port No. for connecting KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 PLC.
Sends a Ping instruction to the port No. to which an IP address has been
(Connection test)
entered, and tests the connection status.
When selecting "USB"

Communication setting is not required.


When selecting "Bluetooth"
Item Description
Enters identification name set to KV-BT1 of connection destination. Able to
register by connection destination search. Identification name is "(PLC
Identification name
name)(single-byte space)(identification name set by unit editor)".
Identification name can be also checked at the access window of PLC.
Enters BD address of KV-BT1 of connection destination. Able to register by
BD Address connection destination search. BD address can be also checked at the
access window of PLC.
Enters the passkey placed in KV-BT1 of connection destination.
Passkey
(Default value: 0000)
"Connection destination Displays "Connection destination search" dialog box. Executes search to
search" find connectable KV-BT1.
COM port No. Bluetooth adapter uses. Manual input of the port No. is
Port No.
possible.
Serial port manual Specifies COM port No. for Bluetooth communication when the checkbox is
allocation on.

• Routing setting
3
Item Description
Communication destination Selects the PLC model to be routed to PC.
via VT/DT (2-port) Checks when VT/DT routing (2-port function) is used.
VT/DT model Selects the model to be routed.
Connection to KV Selects the model to be routed and PLC connection method.
Checks when connected through network routing and selects FL-net,
via network
EtherNet/IP.
Routing unit select Selects the unit to be routed.
(When selecting FL-net through network routing)
Communication destination
Specifies the node No. of connection equipment (KV-5000 or KV-
node No.
FL20V) to be routed.
(When selecting EtherNet/IP through network routing)
Communication destination
Specifies IP address of connection equipment (KV-5500 or KV-EP21V)
IP address
to be routed.
Communication route Displays the connection state of PLC connected to PC.
Selects the method of communication for the directly connected
(Communication method)
equipment to be routed to PC.
Tests the state of PLC and PC connection under current setting. If
"Connection test" connection fails, verify communication setting and cable connection
status.
4 Click "OK" button on "Communication setting" dialog box to complete setting.

Setting details is displayed in "Property" dialog box.
When checking "Connect to KV STUDIO simulator mode", communication with KV STUDIO starts.


5 Click "OK" button on "Property page" dialog box to change set value of property.
Reference KV COM+ Library and KV STUDIO are able to communicate simultaneously.

Operation on both KV STUDIO and KV COM+ Library is possible with a communication
cable such as USB cable because communication route is the same as PLC.
3
KV STUDIO Communication COM server
PC
USB PLC
KV COM+

3-2 DBTriggerManager Control
This section describes how to set the property page of DBTriggerManager control. A trigger that the
determines timing of each behavior is set in this section.
"Name" "Type" "Comments"

Displays trigger Displays trigger setting Displays trigger setting
setting name. type. comments.
"Add" button
Adds trigger setting.
3 Trigger list
Displays trigger
"Change" button
Changes selected trigger
setting. setting.
DBTriggerManager Control
"Delete" button
Deletes selected trigger
setting.
"OK" button "Apply" button

Saves the setting and "Cancel" button Determines "Trigger setting".
closes the dialog box. Closes dialog box without
determining "Trigger setting".
Reference The following property can be set on the property page of DBTriggerManager control.
DBTrigger object DBTriggerParamTimeAt object
Property name Reference page Property name Reference page
Name 4-93 Year 4-106
Type 4-94 Month 4-107
Description 4-95 Day 4-108
Param 4-97 Hour 4-109
AsInterval 4-98 Minute 4-110
AsTimeAt 4-99 Second 4-111
AsTimeSpan 4-100 DayOfWeek 4-112
AsLogical 4-101 Edge 4-113
AsCustom 4-102
AsDevice 4-103
DBTriggerParamInterval object DBTriggerParamTimeSpan object
IntervalMSec 4-105 TimeFrom 4-114
TimeTo 4-115
DBTriggerParamCustom object DBTriggerParamLogical object
OneShot 4-119 Type 4-116
Trigger1 4-117
Trigger2 4-118
DBTriggerParamDevice object
CommManager 4-121
DeviceKind 4-122
DeviceNo 4-123
DeviceCondition 4-124
TriggerBitReset 4-125
ErrorConnect 4-126


Addition of Trigger Setting
This section describes how to add trigger setting.
1 Click "Add" button on "Property" dialog box to display "Trigger setting" dialog box.
2 Click to select trigger type.
• To set a trigger for period
• To set a trigger for time and time range
"Trigger Setting at time and time range"（3-11 page）
• To set a trigger for device
"Trigger Setting for device"（3-15 page）
• To set a trigger by combining already set trigger
"Trigger Setting to combine into already set trigger"（3-18 page）
• To set a random trigger
"Set any trigger"（3-20 page）

 Trigger setting for period

Executes a function once at every set time.
Example
To set a trigger at 100 milliseconds
Trigger ON
Trigger OFF
100 milliseconds 100 milliseconds 100 milliseconds
3 Starts communication
1
Select "Period" from "Type" box.
2 Click "Next" button to proceed to the next step.
3 Input values in "Period" box.

Values from 0 to 2147483647 milliseconds can be set.
Reference Setting at 0 milliseconds results in a trigger occurs continuously.
5 Enter "Name" and "Comment" as necessary.
6 Click "Finish" button.


 Trigger Setting at time and time range
Executes a function at every specified time or within the time range.
Time/ ↑ (Edge)
Executes a function once at every set time for each condition.
Example
To set a trigger at 12:30 (*Conditions for other items are ignored.)
Trigger ON
Trigger OFF
12:30
3
Time/ ON (Level)
Executes a function continuously during the set time for each condition.
Example
To set a trigger at 12:30 (*Setting for other items are "Ignore conditions")
Trigger ON
Trigger OFF
12:30 12:31
Trigger occurs at 12:30 every day and continues for one minute.
Example
To set a trigger at 30 seconds (*Setting for other items are "Ignore conditions".)
Trigger ON
Trigger OFF
30 seconds 31 seconds 30 seconds 31 seconds
Trigger occurs at every 30 seconds and continues for one second..
Time range
Executes a function during the set time range.
Example
To set a trigger the time range from 9:00 to 17:00
Trigger ON
Trigger OFF
9:00 17:00
Point Use with other single trigger because PC becomes overloaded with continuous triggers
which occurs when time ON (level) and time range triggers are set separately for each
function.
"Trigger Setting to combine into already set trigger"（3-18 page）

Setting procedures
1 Select "Time" from "Type".
3
3 Select "Time" or "Time range" from "Type" drop-down list. The display changes according to
the selection.


4 Set each item.
Time
"Condition"
Selects trigger occurrence conditions.
"Up (Edge)"
Trigger occurs once every set time for each
condition.
"ON (Level)"
3
Trigger occurs continuously during the set time
for each condition.
"Ignore"
Check to ignore items at the left of each check
box.
Sets time for trigger ON.
Example
To make a trigger occur at 15 min. To make triggers occur once at 12 o'clock
for 1 min. on week days.

Time range
Sets time range for trigger ON.
3
Example
Setting for a continuous trigger from 9:00:00 to 17:00:00
Reference Time range including 24 o’clock (0:00 AM) such as 23:00:00～3:00:00 can be set.


Device Specification
 Trigger Setting for device

Executes any functions by trigger according to the conditions of specified device.
1 Click and select "Device" at "Type".
2 Click "Next" button to display the next setting dialog box. 3
3 Select "Communication Target" and "Target Device".
Reference Only bit device (or bit-data compliant word device) can be selected.
4 Select "Condition".
↑ (Rising edge)
When the condition of specified device changes from OFF to ON, trigger occurs.
Device ON
Device OFF
Trigger ON
Trigger OFF
Trigger occurs. Trigger occurs.
Reference Since trigger bit changes when detecting trigger by resetting trigger bit, detection of
trigger can be confirmed on the side of PLC.
"↑" …When detecting trigger, trigger bit becomes OFF.
"↓" …When detecting trigger, trigger bit becomes ON.

↓ (Falling edge)
When the condition of specified bit device changes from ON to OFF, trigger occurs.
Device ON
Device OFF
Trigger ON
3 Trigger OFF
Trigger occurs. Trigger occurs.
↑↓ (Both edges)
When the condition of specified bit device changes from OFF to ON or from ON to OFF,
trigger occurs.
Device ON
Device OFF
Trigger ON
Trigger OFF
Trigger occurs. Trigger occurs. Trigger occurs. Trigger occurs.
ON (Level)
Trigger occurs continuously while the condition of the specified bit device is ON.
Device ON
Device OFF
Trigger ON
Trigger OFF
OFF (Level)
Trigger occurs continuously while the condition of the specified bit device is OFF
Device ON
Device OFF
Trigger ON
Trigger OFF


5 Click "Next" button to display the next setting dialog box.
6 Enter characters in "Name" and "Comment" as necessary.

 Trigger Setting to combine into already set trigger
Point Set triggers to be used beforehand.
1 Select "Combination" from "Type".
3
3 Select "Type" of combination
Setting
Description
name
AND Trigger occurs when both trigger conditions set for "Target 1" and "Target 2" are ON.
Trigger occurs when either or both of trigger conditions set for "Target 1" and "Target 2" are
OR
ON.
NOT Trigger occurs when trigger conditions set for "Target 1" is ON.


4 Select trigger conditions for "Target 1" and "Target 2" from each drop-down list.

 Set any trigger

1 Click and select "Any" at "Type".
With the use of any trigger, user can set trigger that occurs at any timing by utilizing SetState method.
3
3 Set "Do OneShot".

When checking: When set SetState method to True and Trigger to ON, trigger becomes OFF
automatically. The use is recommended when making trigger occur at edge.
When not checking: Trigger does not become OFF automatically. To make trigger OFF, SetState
method needs to be made False. The use is recommended when making
trigger occur at level.
"SetState"（4-120 page）
5 Enter characters in "Name" and "Comment" as necessary.


Change of Trigger Setting
This section describes how to change trigger setting.
1 Select trigger setting to be changed.
2 Click "Change" button to display "Trigger setting" dialog box.
3 Change trigger setting in the same way described in "Addition of Trigger Setting"（3-9 3
page）.
Deletion of Trigger Setting
This section describes how to delete trigger setting.
1 Select trigger setting to be deleted.
2 Click "Delete" button.

Message to confirm deletion is displayed.
3 Click "OK" button.

3-3 DBDeviceManager Control
This section describes how to set the property page of DBDeviceManager control. After selecting
DBCommManager to refer, device is registered in this section. Trigger for read and write can be also
selected.
"Communication manager "Device" tab

object" tab Sets device.
Selects DBCommManager "Trigger" tab
control to refer. Selects read triggers and
write triggers.
3
DBDeviceManager Control
"Apply" button
Applies the setting.
"OK" button
"Cancel" button
Saves the setting and closes
Closes the dialog box without
the dialog box.
saving the setting.
Reference The following property can be set on the property page of DBDeviceManager control.
DBDeviceManager object
CommManager 4-50
TriggerRead 4-52
TriggerWrite 4-53
DBDevices object
Count 4-63
Item 4-64
DBDevice object
Kind 4-73
No 4-74
Name 4-74


Communication manager Object
This section describes how to operate the dialog box of "Communication manager object".
Point Allocate DBCommManager control on the same form beforehand.

"3-1 DBCommManager Control"(3-2 page)
1 Click "Commanagement object" tab to display "Communication manager" dialog box.

3
"Target"
Selects DBCommManager control of Target.
2 Select DBCommManager control for "Target".

Reference Changes in connection model to already set device are automatically reflected to the
setting.
Point Specify controls on the CommManager property of DBDeviceManager object when

DBCommManager is allocated using control array. Each controls allocated using control
array are not distinguished in selection.
"CommManager"（4-50 page）

Device
This section describes how to operate "Device" dialog box.
1 Click "Device" tab to display "Device" dialog box.
"Add" button
Adds devices.
3 Device list
Displays a device
"Modify" button
Changes the selected device
list.
"Delete" button
Deletes the selected device.
"All Delete" button

Deletes all devices.
• To add devices
"Addition of device"（3-25 page）
• To change selected device
"Change of device"（3-27 page）
• To delete selected device
"Deletion of device"（3-28 page）
• To delete all devices
"Deletion of all devices"（3-28 page）


 Addition of device
Point Select com management object (DBCommManager) to refer before adding devices.
1 Click "Add" button on "Device" dialog box to display "Device setting" dialog box.
Device Device No.
Selects device type. Inputs device No.
Data count
Inputs quantity of devices to
be created with serial
numbers beginning from
the input device No.
Description
Displays description for
each device.

Saves the "Device setting" and Closes dialog box without saving the "Device
closes dialog box. setting".
2 Select "Device" from the drop-down menu.

"Device List"（A-4 page）
3 Input device number within input range presented in "Description".
4 Input "Data count".


The same number of devices input in the "Data count" are shown with serial numbers starting from the
device Nos.
3


 Change of device
1 Click to select device to be changed from the device list.
2 Click "Modify" button to display "Device setting" dialog box.
Device Device No.
Data count
Cannot enter the quantity
when changing.
Description
Displays description of
each device.

3 Select "Device".
4 Input device No. within the range presented in "Description".
5 Click "OK" button to save device setting change.

 Deletion of device
1 Click a device to be deleted from the device list.
3

A message to confirm the deletion is displayed.
3 Click "OK" button to delete the selected device.
 Deletion of all devices

1 Click "All Delete" button.
2 Click "OK" button to delete all devices.


Trigger
This section describes how to operate "Trigger" dialog box.
Point Allocate DBTriggerManager control on the same form and configure for triggers
beforehand.
"3-2 DBTriggerManager Control"(3-8 page)
1 Click "Trigger" tab to display "Trigger" dialog box. 3
Read trigger
Selects a trigger setting for reading
data.
Sets triggers on the property page of
DBTriggerManager control.
Write trigger
Selects a trigger setting for writing
data.
Sets triggers on the property page of
DBTriggerManager control.
2 Select a trigger to read data at "Read trigger".

3 Select a trigger to write data at "Write trigger".
3

3-4 DBRTLoggingManager Control

This section describes how to set the property page of DBRTLoggingManager control.
After selecting DBRTLoggingManager to refer, device is registered in this section. Start trigger and a
stop trigger for logging/trace can also be selected.
"PLC trigger" tab

"Device" tab Sets trigger conditions.
Sets device.
"Communication "Trigger" tab
manager object" tab Selects start trigger and stop
Selects DBCommManager
control to refer.
trigger for logging/trace. 3
DBRTLoggingManager Control
"Apply" button
Applies the setting.
"Cancel" button
"OK" button Closes the dialog box without saving the setting.
Saves the setting and closes the dialog box.
Reference The following property can be set on the property page of DBRTLoggingManager control

CommManager 4-130
Devices 4-132
TriggerStart 4-133
TriggerStop 4-134
SamplingCycle 4-135
LastID 4-136
TopID 4-137
TriggerID 4-138
LoggingDataCollection 4-139
TriggerDataRatio 4-140
TrgParamBitEnable 4-141
TrgParamBitIndex 4-142
TrgParamBitOn 4-143
TrgParamBitLogicOperator 4-144
TrgParamWordLogicOperator 4-145
TrgParamWordEnable 4-146
TrgParamWordIndex 4-147
TrgParamWordCmpOperator 4-148
TrgParamWordCmpValue 4-149

Commanagement Object
This section describes how to operate the dialog box of "Commanagement object".
Point Allocate DBCommManager control on the same form beforehand.

1 Click "Communication manager object" tab to display "Commanagement object" dialog box.
3
"Target"
Selects DBCommManager control of Target.
2 Select DBCommManager control for "Target".

Reference Changes in connection target to already set device are automatically reflected to the
setting.
Point Specify controls on the CommManager property of DBLoggingManager object when

DBCommManager is allocated using control array. Each control allocated using control
array is not distinguished in selection.
"CommManager"（4-130 page）


Device
This section describes how to operate "Device" dialog box.
1 Click "Device" tab to display "Device" dialog box.
"Add" button
Adds devices.
Device list
Displays device
"Modify" button
Changes the selected 3
list. device.
"Delete" button
Deletes the selected
device.
"All Delete" button

Deletes all devices.
• To add devices
"Addition of device"（3-25 page）
• To change selected device
"Change of device"（3-27 page）
• To delete selected device
"Deletion of device"（3-28 page）
• To delete all devices
"Deletion of all devices"（3-28 page）

 Addition of device
Point Select Communication manager object to add in this process before adding devices.
1 Click "Add" button on "Device" dialog box to display "Device setting" dialog box.
3
Device Device No.

Data count
Inputs quantity of devices to
be created with serial
number beginning the input
device No.
Description
each device.


"Device List"（A-4 page）
3 Input device No. within the range displayed in "Description".
4 Input values in "Data count" box.


The same number of devices as the value inputted in created quantity box are created having serial
number starting from the inputted device No.

 Change of device
1 Click device to be changed from the device list.
2 Click "Modify" button to display "Device setting" dialog box.
3
Device Device No.

Data count
Not able to enter the
quantity for changing.
Description
each device.

4 Input device No. within the range displayed in "Description".
5 Click "OK" button to save device setting change.


 Deletion of device
1 Click device to be deleted from the device list.
3 Click "OK" button to delete the selected device.
 Deletion of all devices

1 Click "All Delete" button.
2 Click "OK" button to delete all devices.

PLC Trigger
This section describes how to operate "PLC trigger" dialog box.
1 Click "PLC trigger" tab to display "PLC trigger" dialog box.
Sets trigger position. Sets trigger conditions for a

bit device.
3 Sets combination of trigger

conditions for a bit device
and for a word device
Sets sampling period.

Sets trigger conditions for a
word device.
2 Set trigger position.

Set data size after the trigger (The unit is %).
3 Set sampling period.
4 Select a trigger condition.
Set bit device.


Select a trigger condition for a bit device from ON/OFF
To set multiple trigger condition, select a combination type.
Select a word device.
Select the relation between word device values and trigger condition values.
Input trigger condition values for a word device.
Select combination type of trigger conditions of a bit device and a word device.
5 Click "OK" button to save PLC trigger setting.

Trigger
This section describes how to operate "Trigger" dialog box.
Point Allocate DBTriggerManager control on the same form and configure for triggers
beforehand.
"3-2 DBTriggerManager Control"(3-8 page)
3 1 Click "Trigger" tab to display "Trigger" dialog box.

Start trigger
Select a trigger setting to start
logging.
Configure triggers on the property
page of DBTriggerManager control
before starting this procedure.
Stop trigger
Select a trigger setting to stop
logging.
Configure triggers on the property
page of DBTriggerManager control
before starting this procedure.
2 Select a trigger to start logging from "Start trigger" drop-down list.


3 Select trigger to stop logging from "Stop trigger" drop-down list.

3-5 DBCommandButton Control
This section describes how to set the property page of DBCommandButton control.
Displays style.
"Select style" button

Displays "Style setting"
dialog box. To change the
3 display style..
DBCommandButton Control
"Cancel" button
Closes the dialog box
without saving the style.
Sets preview conditions. "OK" button
Saves the style and closes the
dialog box.
Reference The following property can be set on the property page of DBCommandButton object.
DBCommandButton object

Status 4-171

3-5 DBCommandButton Control

Basic
This section describes how to operate "Basic" dialog box.
DBCommandButton Control
1 Click "Select style" button to display "Style setting" dialog box.
2 Select "Style" from the drop-down menu.
3 Click "OK" button to save the selected style.

Returns to "Property" dialog box
Confirm the setting on a preview.
4 Click "OK" button to save the selected setting.

3-6 DBBarMeter Control
This section describes how to set the property page of DBBarMeter control.
"Display" tab
"Basic" tab Sets display.
Selects upper and "Scale" tab
lower limits of range Sets scale.
values such as input
range.
3
DBBarMeter Control

Saves the setting and closes Closes dialog box without saving
the dialog box. the setting.
Reference The following property can be set on the property page of DBBarMeterobject.
DBBarMeter object
Reference
Property name
page
InputValue 4-172
InputRangeLowerLimit 4-173
InputRangeUpperLimit 4-173
DisplayRangeLowerLimit 4-175
DisplayRangeUpperLimit 4-175
AlarmRangeLowerLimit 4-176
AlarmRangeUpperLimit 4-176
ShowOptimumValue 4-179
OptimumValue 4-177
ShowLowerAlarm 4-178
ShowUpperAlarm 4-178
ScaleMarkingColor 4-180
ScaleMarkingLowerAlarmColor 4-181
ScaleMarkingUpperAlarmColor 4-181


Basic
1 Click "Basic" tab to display "Basic" dialog box.

Sets preview Displays "Select style" dialog box to
conditions change the style.
Sets lower and upper limits.

3
DBBarMeter Control
Sets ideal values.
"Ideal line"
Check the box to set values for ideal
line.
"Alarm range"
Check the box to set upper and lower
limits for alarm range.
"Display range"
"Draw again" "Auto draw"
For manual drawing of Check the box to make a preview
limits for display range.
the preview when automatically drawn.
"Auto draw" function is
not used.
5 Input values in each range and ideal value boxes.

Confirm the setting by preview.
Return to "Property" dialogue

Display
This section describes how to operate "Display" dialog box.
1 Click "Display" tab to display "Display" dialog box.
Sets displacement direction.

Selects needle line type.
3 Selects needle shape.
Selects data
DBBarMeter Control
Sets preview display

conditions pattern.
"Image Frame"
Check the box to apply desired style for
an image frame.
Selects image frame style.
Opens color setting window.
Selects border line type.

"Background" "Alarm upper limit"
"Draw again"
Check the box to Check the box to display the alarm
For manual drawing
apply desired upper limit line.
of the preview when
color for "Alarm lower limit"
"Auto draw" function
background. Check the box to display the alarm
is not used.
lower limit line.
"Auto draw" "Alarm"
Check the box to make a Check the box to display the alarm
preview automatically lines.
drawn.
2 Select displacement direction from the drop-down menu.
3 Select display method of data from the drop-down menu.


4 Select image frame from the drop-down menu.
5 Select properties for alarm/ideal lines.
DBBarMeter Control

Scale
This section describes how to operate "Scale" dialog box.
1 Click "Scale" tab to display "Scale" dialog box.
Check the box to display the scales.

Check the box to display the scales with
data.
3 Sets preview
Selects scale
position.
Opens color setting
window.
conditions
DBBarMeter Control
Sets spaces for main scales.

Sets spaces for auxiliary scales.
Sets number of display digits.
Sets decimal points.
Sets display font.
"Draw again" Check the box to apply desired value to the scales.
For manual drawing Check the box to apply desired value to the auxiliary
of the preview when scales.
"Auto draw" function Check the box to display the main scale.
is not used. "Auto draw"
Check the box to make a
preview automatically
drawn.
2 Select properties for the scales.
3 Input scale values for each box.

3-7 DBFanMeter Control

This section describes how to set the property page of DBFanMeter control.
"Display" tab
"Basic" tab Sets display.
Selects upper and "Scale" tab
lower limits of range Sets a scale.
values.
DBFanMeter Control
Saves the setting and closes Closes dialog box without saving
the dialog box. the setting.
Reference The following property can be set on the property page of DBFanMeter object.
DBFanMeter object
Reference
Property name
page
InputValue 4-172
InputRangeLowerLimit 4-173
InputRangeUpperLimit 4-173
DisplayRangeLowerLimit 4-175
DisplayRangeUpperLimit 4-175
AlarmRangeLowerLimit 4-176
AlarmRangeUpperLimit 4-176
ShowOptimumValue 4-179
OptimumValue 4-177
ShowLowerAlarm 4-178
ShowUpperAlarm 4-178
ScaleMarkingColor 4-180
ScaleMarkingLowerAlarmColor 4-181
ScaleMarkingUpperAlarmColor 4-181

Basic
1 Click "Basic" tab to display "Basic" dialog box.

Sets preview Displays "Select style" dialog box to
conditions change the style.
3 Sets lower and upper limits.

DBFanMeter Control
Sets ideal values.
"Ideal line"
Check the box to set values for ideal
line.
"Alarm range"
limits for alarm range.
"Draw again" "Auto draw"

"Display range"
For manual drawing of Check the box to make a preview
the preview when automatically drawn.
limits for display range.
"Auto draw" function is
not used.

Return to "Property" dialog box.
5 Input values in each range and ideal value style.

Confirm the setting on the preview.


Display
This section describes how to operate "Display" dialog box.
1 Click "Display" tab to display "Display" dialog box.
Sets displacement direction.
Selects data display pattern.
Sets preview
conditions
Selects needle shape.
3
"Image Frame"
DBFanMeter Control
Check the box to apply desired style for
an image frame.
Selects image frame style.
Opens color setting

window.
Selects alarm and ideal lines type.

"Draw again" "Background"
"Alarm upper limit"
For manual drawing Check the box to
Check the box to display the alarm
of the preview when apply desired
upper limit line.
"Auto draw" function color for
"Alarm lower limit"
is not used. background.
Check the box to display the alarm
lower limit line.
"Auto draw" "Alarm"
Check the box to make a Check the box to display the alarm
preview automatically lines.
drawn.
2 Select displacement direction from the drop-down menu.
3 Select display method of data.

4 Select image frame from the drop-down menu.
5 Select alarm/ideal lines.
3
DBFanMeter Control


Scale
This section describes how to operate "Scale" dialog box.
1 Click "Scale" tab to display "Scale" dialog box.
Check the box to display the scales.
Selects scale
3
Opens color setting
Sets preview position. window.
conditions
DBFanMeter Control
Sets spaces for main scales.
Sets spaces for auxiliary scales.
Sets number of display digits.

Sets decimal points.
Sets display font.
Check the box to apply desired value to the scales.

"Draw again"
For manual drawing Check the box to apply desired value to the auxiliary scales.
of the preview when
"Auto draw" function Check the box to display the main scale.
is not used.
"Auto draw"
Check the box to make a
preview automatically
drawn.
2 Select properties for the scales.
3 Input scale values for each box.

MEMO
3
DBFanMeter Control

4
Property Method Event

Property Method Event 4
This chapter includes properties, methods and events of KV COM+ Library.
4-1 Lists of Properties/Methods/Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2

4-2 Details of Properties/Methods/Events . . . . . . . . . . .4-19
4-3 ActiveX Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-168

4-1 Lists of Properties/Methods/Events
This section briefly introduces what properties, methods and events are of each object.
DBCommManager Object
This is a control (object) to manage communication with connected device.

One DBCommManager object is placed for each device.
This control can read and write synchronously; but cannot go to the next process until one process
completes.
(References) DBDeviceManager, DBTriggerManager
4  Properties
Property Value
Description Value setting Reference
Lists of Properties/Methods/Events
name acquisition
Obtains or sets connected
PLC Yes Yes 4-19
equipment type.
Obtains or configures
Peer Yes Yes 4-21
communication setting.
Obtains communication status
Active Yes No 4-24
with connected devices.
 Method
Method name Description Reference
Displays the dialog box to change communication route to
CommPeer 4-25
connected devices.
Connect Starts communication with connected devices. 4-26
Disconnect Terminates communication with connected devices. 4-27
GetMode Obtains operation mode/status of connected devices. 4-28
SetMode Sets operation mode/status of connected devices. 4-29
GetErrorNumber Gets error number retained by connected devices. 4-30
ClearError Clears error retained by connected devices. 4-31
ReadDevice Reads value of any one devices. 4-32
WriteDevice Writes any value into any one device. 4-36
Reads string with a specified number of characters from the
ReadText 4-37
specified first device of the connected equipment.
Writes string with a specified number of characters to the specified
WriteText 4-38
first device of the connected equipment.

DBCommManager DBMemcardAccess
DBMemcardAccess Object
This object provides the access function to a memory card.

DBMemcardAccess object methods access to a memory card.
Access to a memory card uses connection route to DBCommManager object.
DBMemcardAccess access to a memory card as one of DBCommManager object properties.
* DBMemCardAccess object can be used only when the connected device is KV-5500/5000/3000.
* DBMemcardAccess object cannot be used when the connected device is a simulator.
 Methods
Method name
FileCopyFrom
Description
Copies files on a memory card to path on PC.
Reference
4-39
4
FileCopyTo Copies files on PC to path on a memory card. 4-41
FileState Obtains file status on a memory card. 4-42
FileDelete Deletes files on a memory card. 4-43
Rename Renames files on a memory card. 4-44
MakeDirectory Creates directory on a memory card. 4-45
RemoveDirectory Deletes directory on a memory card 4-46
Obtains the number of files and file names in directory of a
RefleshFileListInDirectory 4-47
memory card and updates file list.
FileNamesInDirectory Obtains file names in directory on a memory card. 4-48
Space Obtains free space in a memory card. 4-49

DBDeviceManager
DBDeviceManager Object
This object allows bulk read and write with multiple devices asynchronously.
It retains DBDevices collection and connects to the device specified with CommManager property.
Reads and writes asynchronously into the retained device collection with ReadAll and WriteAll
methods.
AfterRead and AfterWrite events notify the completion of asynchronous read/write process.
Setting TriggerRead and TriggerWrite properties also enable to read/write when each trigger occurs.
(References) DBDevices, DBDevice
 Properties
4 Property
Description
Value Value
Reference
name acquisition setting
Obtains or set referred Com

CommManager Yes Yes 4-50
management object.
Devices Obtains DBDevices collection. Yes No 4-51
TriggerRead Obtains or sets triggers at reading. Yes Yes 4-52
TriggerWrite Obtains or sets triggers at writing. Yes Yes 4-53
 Methods
IsReading Obtains asynchronous reading status of an object. 4-54
IsWriting Obtains asynchronous writing status of an object. 4-55
Reads the value of the registered device from the connected
ReadAll 4-56
equipment.
Writes the value specified with ValueWrite property into the
WriteAll 4-57
registered device of the connected equipment.
 Events
Event name Description Reference
Occurs at the occurrence of read triggers and execution of ReadAll
BeforeRead method, and before actual execution of the read process to the 4-58
connected equipment.
Occurs after reading a value of the registered device from the
AfterRead 4-59
Occurs at the occurrence of write triggers and execution of WriteAll
BeforeWrite method, and before actual execution of the write process to the 4-60
Occurs after writing a value to the registered device of the
AfterWrite 4-61
Occurs at occurrence of an error during the asynchronous write
Error 4-62
process with the connected equipment.

DBDeviceManager DBDevices
DBRTLoggingManager DBDevices
DBDevices Object
This object represents DBDevices collection.

This is retained by DBDeviceManager or DBRTLoggingManager, and obtained by Devices property.
(References) DBDeviceManager, DBDevice, DBRTLoggingManager
 Properties
Value Value
Property name Description Reference
acquisition setting
Obtains the number of devices
Count Yes No 4-63
included in the collection.
Obtains the device registered in
4
Item Yes No 4-64
the specified index.
 Methods
Add Adds new device to the collection. 4-65
Insert Inserts a device into the specified index in the collection. 4-66
Remove Removes the specified device from the collection. 4-67
Clear Clears all devices in the collection. 4-68
AddRTL Adds a device for real-time logging to the collection. 4-69
InsertRTL Inserts a device for real-time logging to the collection. 4-71

DBDeviceManager DBDevices DBDevice

DBRTLoggingManager DBDevices DBDevice
DBDevice Object
This object indicates devices for asynchronously reading and writing.

This is generated by Add method or AddRTL method of DBDevices object retained by

DBDeviceManager or DBRTLoggingManager.
(References) DBDeviceManager, DBRTLoggingManager
 Properties
Value
Value Refere
Property name Description acquisitio
setting nce
n
4 Kind Obtains device type. Yes No 4-73
No Obtains device number. Yes No 4-74
Obtains strings consisting of the string

Name Yes No 4-74
of device type and device number.
Obtains a value of device read from the
ValueRead Yes No 4-75
Obtains or set a value written into the
ValueWrite Yes Yes 4-76
device.
Obtains whether the value is actually
IsValueReadValid read from the equipment by ValueRead Yes No 4-77
property.
Allows/prohibits the read from the
ReadEnabled Yes Yes 4-78
connected device.
Allows/prohibits the write into the
WriteEnabled Yes Yes 4-79
connected device.
Obtains or sets the data size of real-
RTLDataSize Yes Yes 4-80
time logging device.
Obtains or sets the data type of real-
RTLDataType Yes Yes 4-81
time logging device.
Obtains or sets the display format of
RTLDispType Yes Yes 4-82
real-time logging device.
Obtains or sets the management
RTLManageIndex identification number of real-time Yes Yes 4-83
logging device.

DBTriggerManager
DBTriggerManager Object
This control (object) manages triggers that determine timings for DBDeviceManager to read/write, and

for DBRTLoggingManager to start/stop. This can be used independently.
This control contains DBTriggers collection.
(References) DBTriggers, DBTrigger
 Properties
Property Value Value
Description Reference
Active
Obtains or sets whether trigger is
valid or invalid.
Yes Yes 4-84 4
Triggers Obtains DBTriggers collection. Yes No 4-85
 Events
Occurs every time trigger condition within DBTriggers collection is
Fire 4-86
established.
DBTriggers Object
This object represents DBTriggers collection.

This is retained by DBTriggerManager and obtained with Triggers properties.
(References) DBTriggerManager, DBTrigger
 Properties
Value Value
acquisition setting
Obtains the number of triggers
Count Yes No 4-87
included in the collection.
Obtains the trigger of the specified
Item Yes No 4-88
index.
 Methods
Add Adds new triggers to the collection. 4-89
Remove Removes the specified trigger from the collection. 4-90
Clear Removes all triggers from the collection. 4-91
FindByName Searches for the trigger within the collection by name. 4-92

DBTriggerManager DBTriggers DBTrigger
DBTrigger Object
This object represents triggers.

This is generated by Add method of DBTriggers object retained by DBTriggerManager.

Each trigger can be obtained/set with the property of object obtained with Param or As- property.
Fire event occurs as long as the conditions are met.
(References) DBTriggerManager, DBTriggers
 Properties
4 Name Obtains or sets trigger name. Yes Yes 4-93
Type Obtains or sets trigger types. Yes Yes 4-94
Description Obtains or sets trigger comments. Yes Yes 4-95

Obtains trigger status. Sets to True
IsOn Yes No 4-96
when the trigger conditions are met.
Param Obtains trigger object. Yes No 4-97
AsInterval Obtains interval trigger object. Yes No 4-98
AsTimeAt Obtains time trigger object. Yes No 4-99
AsTimeSpan Obtains time range trigger object. Yes No 4-100
AsLogical Obtains combination trigger object. Yes No 4-101
AsCustom Obtains any trigger object. Yes No 4-102
AsDevice Obtains device trigger object. Yes No 4-103
 Events
Fire Occurs every time trigger condition is established. 4-104
Error Occurs when a communication error occurs in a device trigger. 4-129

DBTriggerManager DBTriggers DBTrigger DBTriggerParamInterval

DBTriggerParamInterval Object
This is interval trigger object.

A trigger occurs at specified interval.
This can be obtained by Param or AsInterval property when DBTrigger object type is an interval trigger.
(Reference) DBTrigger
 Properties
Value Value
acquisition setting
IntervalMSec
Obtains or sets interval of trigger
occurrence by millisecond.
Yes Yes 4-105 4
DBTriggerParamTimeAt Object
This is a time trigger object.

A trigger occurs at the edge or level for each specified time based on the computer clock.
This can be obtained with Param or AsTimeAt property when DBTrigger object type is a time trigger.
 Properties
Year Obtains or sets the year condition. Yes Yes 4-106
Month Obtains or sets the month condition. Yes Yes 4-107
Day Obtains or sets the day condition. Yes Yes 4-108
Hour Obtains or sets the hour condition. Yes Yes 4-109
Minute Obtains or sets the minute condition. Yes Yes 4-110
Second Obtains or sets the second condition. Yes Yes 4-111
Obtains or sets the day-of-week
DayOfWeek Yes Yes 4-112
condition.
Obtains or sets the condition that
Edge Yes Yes 4-113
trigger occurs (edge or level).

DBTriggerManager DBTriggers DBTrigger DBTriggerParamTimeSpan

DBTriggerParamTimeSpan Object
This is a time range trigger object.

A trigger occurs from the start time to the end time based on the time of computer.
This can be obtained by Param or AsTimeSpan property when DBTrigger object type is a time range
trigger.
 Properties
4 TimeFrom
Obtains or sets the start time of trigger
Yes Yes 4-114
occurrence.
Obtains or sets the end time of trigger

TimeTo Yes Yes 4-115
occurrence.
DBTriggerParamLogical Object
This is a combination trigger object.

A trigger occurs when the trigger status of one or two trigger objects referred meets logical condition
specified for the object.
This can be obtained with Param or AsLogical property when DBTrigger object type is a combination
trigger.
 Properties
Obtains or sets the logical condition of
Type Yes Yes 4-116
combination.
Obtains or sets trigger1 to be
Trigger1 Yes Yes 4-117
combined.
Obtains or sets trigger2 to be
Trigger2 Yes Yes 4-118
combined.

DBTriggerManager DBTriggers DBTrigger DBTriggerParamCustom
DBTriggerParamCustom Object
This is an any trigger object.

This can be obtained with Param or AsCustom property when DBTrigger object type is an any trigger.
 Properties
Obtains or sets the automatic OFF
OneShot Yes Yes 4-119
setting of any trigger.
4
 Methods
SetState Sets any trigger to ON. 4-120

DBTriggerManager DBTriggers DBTrigger DBTriggerParamDevice
DBTriggerParamDevice Object
This is a device trigger object.

This can be obtained with Param or AsDevice property when DBTrigger object type is a device trigger.
 Properties
Obtains or sets the Commanagement
4 CommManager object "to be connected" used for a

device trigger.
Yes Yes 4-121
Obtains or sets the type of "target

DeviceKind Yes Yes 4-122
device" used for a device trigger.

Obtains or sets the "target device
DeviceNo Yes Yes 4-123
number" used for a device trigger.
Obtains or sets the "condition" of
DeviceCondition Yes Yes 4-124
trigger used for a device trigger.
Obtains or sets the "trigger bit reset"
TriggerBitReset Yes Yes 4-125
used for a device trigger.
Obtains the error information of the
ErrorConnect Commanagement object used for a Yes No 4-126
device trigger.
 Methods
ClearError Clears communication error status of a device trigger. 4-127
SetDevice Sets the "target device" used for a device trigger. 4-128

DBRTLoggingManager
DBRTLoggingManager Object
This is an object to ensure real-time logging function to log within PLC of KV series.

It contains DBRTLoggingDataCollection collection.
It communicates with the connected equipment specified with CommManager property and performs
logging into the device registered for the real-time logging in DBDevice object. Logging is performed at
every sampling interval specified within PLC, and AfterRead event notifies the completion of the
reading of obtained logging data.
Trigger conditions to start and stop logging must be set up. The device set by DBTriggerManager or
any timing can be specified as a trigger.
* DBRTLoggingManager object can be used only when the connected equipment is KV-5500/5000/3000.
* DBRTLoggingManager object cannot be used when the connected equipment is a simulator.
(References) DBRTLoggingDataCollection, DBDeviceManager
4
 Properties
Value Value
acquisition setting
Obtains or sets the referred Com
CommManager Yes No 4-130
management object.
Obtains or sets the DBDevices
Devices Yes Yes 4-132
collection.
TriggerStart Obtains or sets the start trigger. Yes Yes 4-133
TriggerStop Obtains or sets the stop trigger. Yes Yes 4-134
Obtains or sets the sampling
SamplingCycle Yes Yes 4-135
cycle.
LastID Obtains the obtained data ID. Yes No 4-136
Obtains the latest sampled data
TopID Yes No 4-137
ID.
Obtains the data ID with PLC
TriggerID Yes No 4-138
trigger.
LoggingDataCollec Obtains the DBRTLoggingData
Yes No 4-139
tion collection.
Obtains or sets the data amount
TriggerDataRatio Yes Yes 4-140
(%) after trigger.
TrgParamBitEnabl Obtains or sets the trigger
Yes Yes 4-141
e1 - 4 condition of bit device 1-4.
Obtains or sets the index number
TrgParamBitIndex1 of DBDevices collection which
Yes Yes 4-142
-4 stores bit device specified as
trigger condition (bit device 1-4).
TrgParamBitOn1 - Obtains or sets ON/OFF of bit
Yes Yes 4-143
4 device 1-4.
TrgParamBitLogic Obtains or sets the bit device
Yes Yes 4-144
Operator condition (AND/OR).
TrgParamWordLog Obtains or sets the logic operator
Yes Yes 4-145
icOperator of word device.
TrgParamWordEna Obtains or sets the trigger
Yes Yes 4-146
ble condition of word device.

DBRTLoggingManager
Value Value
acquisition setting
Obtains or sets the index number
TrgParamWordInd of DBDevices collection which
Yes Yes 4-147

ex stores word device specified as
trigger condition (word device).
TrgParamWordCm Obtains or sets the comparison
Yes Yes 4-148
pOperator operator of word device.
TrgParamWordCm Obtains or sets the comparison
Yes Yes 4-149
pValue value of word device.
 Methods
4
GetStatus Obtains the status of real-time logging. 4-150

ReadData Obtains the specified data. 4-151
RTLoggingStart Starts real-time logging. 4-152
RTLoggingStop Stops real-time logging. 4-153
GetTrgParamBit Obtains the trigger condition of PLC trigger (bit device). 4-154
SetTrgParamBit Sets the trigger condition of PLC trigger (bit device). 4-155
GetTrgParamWord Obtains the trigger condition of PLC trigger (word device). 4-156
SetTrgParamWord Sets the trigger condition of PLC trigger (word device). 4-157
 Events
Occurs before actual reading of data from the equipment after
BeforeRead 4-158
executing ReadData method.
AfterRead Occurs after reading values. 4-159

DBRTLoggingManager
DBRTLoggingDataCollection Structure
Reference When DBRTLoggingManager is used to execute real-time logging, data of multiple

registered devices is buffered into within PLC of KV series.

Buffered data is read using ReadData method via communication. When ReadData
method is used to read logging data, ID and the number of data to be read are specified.
A read data block is treated as DBRTLoggingData collection.
Example) Among sampled data, data ID 5000 - 5499 are read with ReadData method.
IsSuccess=DBRTLogginManager.ReadData(5000,500)
Data ID
Devices.Item(1)
DM0
Devices.Item(2)
DM10
•••••
Devices.Item(10)
DM100
••••• 4
Data ID
0 18543 14256 ••••• 35201 •••••
1 18546 14246 ••••• 35198 •••••
2 ：：：
：：：：
5032 18556 14249 ••••• 35210 •••••
5033 18549 14251 ••••• 35206 •••••
5034 18550 14253 ••••• 35194 •••••
：：：：
This part becomes DBRTLoggingDataCollection.
Read data by ReadData is sorted beginning from the index 0 by each sampling device within
DBRTLoggingDataCollection.
Therefore, index and sampling device must be specified to read in order to obtain specific data.
Example) When 10th DM 100 data of sampling device with index 126 is read:
value=DBRTLoggingManager1.LoggingDataCollection.Item(126).DataValues(10).Value
Sampling device
Devices.Item(1) Devices.Item(2) Devices.Item(10)
••••• •••••
DM0 DM10 DM100
Data ID Index
5000 0 18541 14261 ••••• 35208 •••••
5001 1 18552 14244 ••••• 35192 •••••
5002 2 ：：：
：：：：
5125 125 18562 14251 ••••• 35208 •••••
5126 126 18548 14256 ••••• 35201 •••••
127 18546 14249 ••••• 35195 •••••
：：：：
DBRTLoggingData
（DBRTLoggingManager1.LoggingDataCollection.Item(126)）
DBRTLoggingDataValue
（DBRTLoggingManager1.LoggingDataCollection.Item(126).DataValues(10)）

DBRTLoggingManager DBRTLoggingDataCollection
DBRTLoggingDataCollection Object
This object represents DBRTLoggingDataCollection collection.

This is retained by DBRTLoggingManager and obtained by LoggingDataCollection property.

This retains DBRTLoggingData collection.
* DBRTLoggingDataCollection object can be used only when the connected equipment is KV-5500/5000/
3000.
* DBRTLoggingDataCollection object cannot be used when the connected equipment is a simulator.
(Reference) DBRTLoggingManager
 Properties
4 Property Value Value
Obtains the number of

Count DBRTLoggingData included in the Yes No 4-160
collection.
Obtains DBRTLoggingData registered
Item Yes No 4-161
for the specified index.

DBRTLoggingManager DBRTLoggingDataCollection DBRTLoggingData
DBRTLoggingData Object
This object represents DBRTLoggingData collection.

This is retained by DBRTLoggingDataCollection and obtained with Item property.
This contains DBRTLoggingDataValue collection.
* DBRTLoggingData object can be used only when the connected equipment is KV-5500/5000/3000.
* DBRTLoggingData object cannot be used when the connected equipment is a simulator.
(Reference) DBRTLoggingDataCollection
 Properties
Property
name
Description
Value
acquisition
Value
setting
Reference 4
Id Obtains data ID. Yes No 4-162
DateTime Obtains date and time of sampling. Yes No 4-163
Stores whether data includes PLC
PLCTrigger Yes No 4-163
trigger or not.
Obtains the number of devices (up to
DeviceCount Yes No 4-164
128).
DeviceValues Obtains device data collection. Yes No 4-165

DBRTLoggingManager DBRTLoggingDataCollection DBRTLoggingData DBRTLoggingDataValue
DBRTLoggingDataValue Object
This object represents DBRTLoggingDataValue collection.

This is retained by DBRTLoggingData and obtained with DeviceValues property.

* DBRTLoggingDataValue object can be used only when the connected equipment is KV-5500/5000/3000.
* DBRTLoggingDataValue object cannot be used when the connected equipment is a simulator.
(Reference) DBRTLoggingData
 Properties
4 name
Obtains device type.
acquisition setting
DeviceType Yes No 4-166

dtBit: 0 / dtWord : 1 / dtDWord: 2
Value Obtains sampled device data. Yes No 4-167

4-2 Details of Properties/Methods/Events
This section describes what are properties, methods and events for each object.
Reference For more information on error details of each runtime, see "Error Message Lists"(A-
10 page).

DBCommManager Object
Properties
 PLC Property 4
Obtains or sets the connected equipment type.
Details of Properties/Methods/Events
Reference This property can be set in the property window.
Communication Value
Value setting
status acquisition
Communication
Yes Yes
suspended
Communicating Yes No (Runtime error occurs)
● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBCommManager. PLC
When setting: DBCommManager. PLC = value
Value Description Type

Constant or value to specify the
value DBPlcId or Long
connected equipment
Constant which can be set as value
Constant Value Description
DBPLC_DKV5000 515 Keyence KV-5500、KV-5000、KV-L20V、KV-LE21V、KV-

LE20V、KV-EP21V
DBPLC_DKV3000 515 Keyence KV-3000、KV-L2V、KV-LE21V、KV-LE20V
DBPLC_DKV1000 7 Keyence KV-1000、KV-L20(R)、KV-LE20
DBPLC_DKV700 7 Keyence KV-700、KV-L20(R)、KV-LE20
DBPLC_DKV5000_XYM 4611 Keyence KV-5500、KV-5000、KV-L20V、KV-LE21V、KV-

LE20V、KV-EP21V
DBPLC_DKV3000_XYM 4611 Keyence KV-3000、KV-L2V、KV-LE21V、KV-LE20V
DBPLC_DKV1000_XYM 4103 Keyence KV-1000、KV-L20(R)、KV-LE20

DBCommManager
● Explanation
Obtains or sets a value to be set for the connected equipment type.
This property is set before starting communication.
Runtime error occurs when a value is set during communication.
The connected equipment type is automatically changed to the device of the equipment type after the
change when the change is to already set devices.
"Model Change"(A-9 page)
● References
“DBCommManager.Active”(4-24 page)
"Connect"(4-26 page)
4
"Disconnect"(4-27 page)
● Usage Example

MyBase.Load
AxDBCommManager1.PLC = DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBPlcId.DBPLC_DKV5000
AxDBCommManager1.Peer = "USB"
'AxDBCommManager1.Peer = "192.168.0.10:8500" ' If connecting to Ethernet
AxDBCommManager1.Connect()
End Sub

DBCommManager
 Peer Property
Obtains or sets configuration of communication with the connected equipment.

Reference This property can be set in property page or the communication configuration dialog box

displayed using CommPeer method.
"CommPeer"(4-25 page)
Communication status Value acquisition Value setting

Communication suspended Yes Yes
Communicating Yes Yes*
* Configuration changed during communication becomes valid from the next communication.
4
● Syntax
When obtaining: text = DBCommManager. Peer
When setting: DBCommManager. Peer = text

String to indicate configuration of communication with the
text String
connected equipment
Configuration example of text
Connection method Format Example

USB "USB" "USB"
RS-232C "(Communication port), (Communication speed)" "COM1, 9600"
Ethernet "(IP address) : (Port number)" "192.168.0.10:8500"
"1,1,0,KV-
"(P1),(P2),(P3),(P4),(P5),(P6)"
Bluetooth 5000,00:03:7A:C0:60,
* See "Bluetooth communication format" below
1111"
"(Basic information
setting);Via,(P01),(P02),(P03),(P04),(P05),(P06),(P07),( "USB;Via,,10,2,4,2,1,1
Route setting
P08),(P09),(P10),(P11)" ,2,1,0,0,192.168.0.10"
* See "Route setting communication format " below
Bluetooth communication format
Item Content Description

Configuration value Sets communication port number.
P1
of virtual COM port Parameter: 1-100
Sets protocol stuck type.
Parameter: 0
P2 Protocol stuck type
(* Driver provided by Bluetooth dongle manufacturer may not be able to
communicate with the parameter of 0. Contact your local sales representative.)
Sets whether to communicate automatically or manually.
Automatic/Manual Parameter:
P3
setting 0: COM automatic
1: Manual
P4 Identification name Sets identification name configured with <<KV STUDIO>>.
P5 BD address Sets BD address of KV-BT1.
P6 Path key Sets path key configured with <<KV STUDIO>>.

DBCommManager
Route setting communication format

Basic
Basic information
information Sets communication route between PC and connected equipment.
setting
setting
Sets communication route.
Communicate with PLC connected with serial:
DLLTYPE_SERI (1)
Communicate with PLC connected with USB:
DLLTYPE_USB (2)
Communicate with PLC connected via Ethernet:
DLLTYPE_IP (4)
4 Configuration
Communicate via VT connected with serial:
DLLTYPE_VTSERI (7)
Communicate via VT connected with USB:
value of
P01 DLLTYPE_VTUSB (8)

communication
Communicate via VT connected with Ethernet:
port
DLLTYPE_VTIP (9)
Communicate via DT connected with USB:
DLLTYPE_DTUSB (10)
Communicate via KV connected with USB:
DLLTYPE_KVUSB (13)
Direct Bluetooth connection with PLC:
DLLTYPE_BLUETOOTH (15)
Communicate via KV connected with Bluetooth:
DLLTYPE_ACL_BLUETOOTH (16)
Sets the target equipment to communicate.
Communication Parameter:
P02
target 1: KV-1000/700
2: KV-5500/5000/3000
Sets communication port on the PC side.
Parameter:
PC
2: Ethernet
P03 communication
3: Serial
port
4: USB
5: Bluetooth
Sets whether to use via VT/DT.
Parameter:
P04 Via VT/DT
1: Use
2: Do not use
Sets device type when using via VT/DT.
Parameter:
P05 VT/DT device type 1: DT-100A
2: VT2
3: VT3
Sets communication method with VT/DT when setting to via VT/
DT.
Connection with
P06 Parameter:
KV
1: Serial
2: via LM20V
Sets whether to use via FL-net.
Parameter:
P07 Via FL-net
1: Use
2: Do not use

DBCommManager

Sets whether to use via EtherNet/IP.
Parameter:
P08 Via EtherNet/IP
1: Use

2: Do not use
Sets unit number to go through.
P09 Route unit number
Parameter: 0-48
P10 Route unit name Sets the same value as the route unit number.
Via FL-net: node number
Target unit
P11 Parameter: 1-254
address
Via EtherNet/IP: IP address
● Explanation 4
Obtains or sets strings to indicate the configuration of communication with the connected equipment.
This property is configured before starting communication.
If configuration is changed during connection, it is valid from the next connection.
● References
"PLC"(4-19 page)
"CommPeer"(4-25 page)
● Usage Example
See the Usage Example in "PLC"(4-19 page).

DBCommManager
 Active Property
Obtains status of communication with the connected equipment but does not set.

Communication suspended Yes No

Communicating Yes No
● Syntax
value = DBCommManager. Active
4 value
Boolean value to represent status of communication
with the connected equipment.
Boolean
Value for ’value’
Keyword Description
True Communicating
False Communication suspended
● Explanation
Obtains status of communication with the connected equipment but cannot set.
Returns "True" when "Connect" method is executed until "Disconnect" method is executed.
Also returns "True" when communication is not actually established yet or a communication error
occurs after "Connect" method is executed.
● References
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
If AxDBCommManager1.Active Then
AxDBCommManager1.Disconnect()
Else
End If
End Sub

DBCommManager
Methods
 CommPeer Method

Displays dialog box to change configuration of communication with the connected equipment.
Communication status Operation

Communication suspended Yes
Communicating Yes*
* Configuration changed during communication becomes valid from the next communication.
● Syntax
DBCommManager.CommPeer()
4
● Description
Displays communication setting dialog box to change Peer property.
● References
"Peer"(4-21 page)
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
AxDBCommManager1.CommPeer()
End Sub

DBCommManager
 Connect Method
Starts communication with the connected equipment.


Communicating No (Nothing is executed)
● Syntax
DBCommManager. Connect
● Explanation
4 Starts communication on communication configuration of “Peer” property to the connected equipment

configured with “PLC” property.
Nothing is executed if the communication is already started, so the communication continues.
An error at the time communication starts results in runtime error.
● References
"PLC"(4-19 page)
"Peer"(4-21 page)
“DBCommManager.Active” (4-24 page)
● Usage Example
See Usage Example in "PLC"(4-19 page).

DBCommManager
 Disconnect Method
Disconnects communication with the connected equipment.

Communication suspended No (Nothing is executed)
Communicating Yes
● Syntax
DBCommManager.Disconnect
● Explanation
Terminates communication when communicating with the connected equipment.
Nothing is executed when communication is suspended. 4
An error at the time communication stops results in runtime error.
● References
"PLC"(4-19 page)
"Peer"(4-21 page)
● Usage Example
See Usage Example in “DBCommManager.Active” (4-24 page).

DBCommManager
 GetMode Method
Obtains operation mode/status of the connected equipment.

Communication suspended No (Runtime error occurs)

Communicating Yes
● Syntax
value = DBCommManager.GetMode
4 value
Boolean value to represent operation
mode/status.
Boolean
Value for ’value’
Keyword Description
True Connected equipment: RUN mode
False Connected equipment: PROGRAM mode
● Explanation
Obtains operation mode/status of the connected equipment.
Works only during communication.
Execution while communication is suspended or a problem occurs at the time of execution results in
runtime error.
● References
"SetMode"(4-29 page)
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
AxDBCommManager1.SetMode(False)
Else
AxDBCommManager1.SetMode(True)
End If
End Sub

DBCommManager
 SetMode Method
Sets operation mode/status of the connected equipment.

Communicating Yes
● Syntax
DBCommManager.SetMode (value)
value
Boolean value to represent operation
mode/status.
Boolean
4
Keyword available for value
Keyword Description
True Connected equipment: RUN mode
False Connected equipment: PROGRAM mode
● Explanation
Sets operation mode/status of the connected equipment.
runtime error.
● References
"GetMode"(4-28 page)
● Usage Example
See Usage Example in "GetMode"(4-28 page).

DBCommManager
 GetErrorNumber Method
Reads error number retained by the connected equipment.


Communicating Yes
● Syntax
value= DBCommManager. GetErrorNumber
4 value Error number Integer
● Explanation
Reads error numbers retained by the connected equipment.

runtime error.
For details on error numbers, see the user’s guide of the connected equipment.
● References
"ClearError"(4-31 page)
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
MsgBox("Error" & AxDBCommManager1.GetErrorNumber, vbOKOnly)
End Sub

DBCommManager
 ClearError Method
Clears error information held by the connected equipment.

Communicating Yes
● Syntax
DBCommManager. ClearError
● Explanation
Clears error information held by the connected equipment.
Works only during communication. 4
runtime error.
● References
"GetErrorNumber"(4-30 page)
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
If AxDBCommManager1.GetErrorNumber <> 0 Then
AxDBCommManager1.ClearError()
End If
End Sub

DBCommManager
 ReadDevice Method
Reads value of any one device of the connected model.


Communicating Yes
● Syntax
value=DBCommManager.ReadDevice(device, strNo)
4 value
device
Read value of device
Specifies device type
Long
DBPlcDevice or Long
strNo Specifies device number String
List of device type and device number

For KV-5000 (Use device type of KV-5000 for KV-5500):
Device type
Device number Description
Constant Value
00000 - 99915
DKV5000_RLY_B 0 Relay
(Last two digits are 0 - 15)
0000 - 3915
DKV5000_CR 10 Control relay
Bit DKV5000_T 7 0000 - 3999 Timer (contact point)
DKV5000_C 8 0000 - 3999 Counter (contact point)
DKV5000_CTC 9 0-3 CTC (contact point)
0000000 - 6553415
DKV5000_DM_B 30 Data memory (treated as bit)
DKV5000_DM 18 00000 - 65534 Data memory
00000 - 99900 Relay
DKV5000_RLY_W 25
(Last two digits are 00) （00000 - 99900）
0000 - 3900 Control relay
DKV5000_CR_W 100
DKV5000_TM 19 000 - 511 Temporary data
DKV5000_TRM 20 0 - 7 Trimmer
Word DKV5000_TS 21 0000 - 3999 Timer (configured value)
DKV5000_TC 22 0000 - 3999 Timer (current value)
DKV5000_CS 23 0000 - 3999 Counter (configured value)
DKV5000_CC 24 0000 - 3999 Counter (current value)
DKV5000_CTH 16 0-1 Hi-speed counter (current value)
DKV5000_CTC_W 17 0-3 CTC (configured value)
DKV5000_CM 29 00000 - 5999 Control memory

DBCommManager
For KV-3000:
Device type
Constant Value

00000 - 99915
0000 - 3915
DKV3000_CTC 9 0 -3 CTC (contact point)
DKV3000_DM_B 30
0000000 - 6553415
Data memory (treated as bit) 4
00000 - 99900 Relay
DKV3000_RLY_W 25
DKV3000_CR_W 100
For KV-1000:
Device type
Constant Value
00000 - 59915
0000 - 3915
DKV1000_CTC 9 0 -3 CTC (contact point)
0000000 - 6553415

DBCommManager
Device type
Constant Value
00000 - 59900 Relay

DKV1000_RLY_W 25
DKV1000_CR_W 100
4 DKV1000_TC
DKV1000_CS
22
23
0000 - 3999
0000 - 3999
Timer (current value)
Counter (configured value)

For KV-700:
Device type
Constant Value
00000 - 59915
0000 - 3915

DKV700_CTC 9 0-3 CTC (contact point)
0000000 - 3999915
00000 - 59900 Relay
DKV700_RLY_W 25
DKV700_CR_W 100
DKV700_TRM 20 0-7 Trimmer
● Explanation
Reads the device value specified as argument from the connected equipment.

DBCommManager

Runtime error occurs if reading when communication is suspended or if problem occurs when reading.
● References

"WriteDevice"(4-36 page)
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
MsgBox(AxDBCommManager1.ReadDevice(DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBPlcDevice.DKV5000_DM, _
"0")) 4
End Sub

DBCommManager
 WriteDevice Method
Write any value into any one device of connected equipment type.


Communicating Yes
● Syntax
DBCommManager. WriteDevice (device, strNo, value)
4 device
strNo
Specifies device type.
Specifies device number.
DBPlcDevice or Long
String
value Specifies device value to be written. Long
"List of device type and device number"(4-32 page)
● Explanation
Writes the value specified for one device specified with argument of the connected equipment.
runtime error.
● References
"ReadDevice"(4-32 page)
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim a As Long
a = AxDBCommManager1.ReadDevice(DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBPlcDevice.DKV5000_DM, "0")
AxDBCommManager1.WriteDevice(DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBPlcDevice.DKV5000_DM, "10", a * 10)
End Sub

DBCommManager
 ReadText (EX) Method
Reads the specified number of strings from the starting device specified in the connected equipment.

Communicating Yes
● Syntax
DBCommManager.ReadText(device,strNo,lMaxlen,strText)
（DBCommManager.ReadTextEx(device,strNo,lMaxlen,strText) (When using VBScript))
device Specifies device type. DBPlcDevice 4
strNo Specifies device number. String
Specifies maximum string length (by
word) to be read.
Two ASCII characters can be stored for
lMaxlen Long
one word device.
Up to 128-word devices (256 characters)
can be specified.
String ("Variant" when using
strText Strings to be read
VBscript.)
● Explanation
Reads stored string data led by specified device type and device number. The number of strings can be
read to the maximum string length (word base) (two 1-byte characters for one word). Strings are read
until the first NULL from the beginning is detected and the read strings are stored. When there is no
NULL in the maximum string length (word base) a string with NULL is stored after the maximum length
of strings is read.
When there is a value which cannot be converted as a string, runtime error occurs.
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim strRText As String
AxDBCommManager1.ReadText(DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBPlcDevice.DKV5000_DM, "0", 1, _
strRText)
TextBox1.Text = strRText
End Sub

DBCommManager
 WriteText Method
Reads strings containing a specified number of characters from the first device of the connected
equipment.

Communicating Yes
● Syntax
DBCommManager.WriteText(device,strNo,lMaxlen,strText)

4 device Specifies device type. DBPlcDevice
strNo Specifies device number. String
Specifies the maximum string length

(word base) to be written.
One word device can store two ASCII
characters.
lMaxlen Long
Storage for NULL written in the ending of
string is also necessary.
Available maximum value is 128-word
devices (256 characters).
strText Strings to be written String
● Explanation
Reads stored string data led by specified device type and device number.
The number of strings that can be written is the maximum string length (word base) or less including
trailing NULL (one byte). (Two 1-byte characters can be written for one word.)
If written data contains no NULL before reaching the maximum string length, NULL is attached to the
(maximum string length x 2-1)th character from the beginning when the data is written.
In addition, runtime error occurs if there is any value that cannot be converted as a string.
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim strWText As String
strWText = TextBox1.Text
AxDBCommManager1.WriteText(DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBPlcDevice.DKV5000_DM, "0", 10, _
strWText)
End Sub

DBMemcardAccess Object
DBMemCardAccess object is available only when the connected equipment is KV-5500/5000/3000.

Methods
 FileCopyFrom Method
Copies file on a memory card to path of PC.

Communication suspended No 4
Communicating Yes
Reference Up to 256 MB can be copied for one file.
● Syntax
ret = FileCopyFrom(strPathMemcard, strPathLocal, Flag)

ret See "Error Message Lists"(A-10 page). lAxError
Specifies path within a memory card to copy to.
strPathMemcard String
* Specifies after (IP address) /MMC.
strPathLocal Specifies path of copy source. String
Flag Specifies operation condition. DBMemFlag
Keyword available for Flag
Keyword Value Description

Restricts overwrite when a file with the same name in the copy
mfOverWriteProtect 0
destination.
Allows overwrite when a file with the same name in the copy
mfOverWriteArrow 1
destination.
-- (Others) － Invalid parameter error occurs.
● Explanation
Copies file stored in a memory card within PLC to path of PC.
runtime error.
(* Only available when the connected PLC is KV-5500/5000/3000)
● References
"FileCopyTo"(4-41 page)

● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim PLCFileName As String
Dim PCFileName As String

Dim err As Long
PLCFileName ="Test.csv"
PCFileName = " C:\Users\Public\Documents\Sample\Test.csv"
err = AxDBCommManager1.MemcardAccess.FileCopyFrom(PLCFileName, PCFileName, _
DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBMemFlag.mfOverWriteProtect)
End Sub
4

 FileCopyTo Method
Copies file on PC to path on a memory card.

Communication suspended No
Communicating Yes
Reference Up to 256 MB can be copied for one file.
● Syntax
ret = FileCopyTo(strPathLocal, strPathMemcard, Flag)
Value Description Type 4

strPathLocal Specifies path of copy source. String
Specifies path in a memory card of copy
strPathMemcard destination. String

mfOverWriteProtect 0 Restricts overwrite when a file with the same name in the copy destination.
mfOverWriteArrow 1 Allows overwrite when a file with the same name in the copy destination.
● Explanation
Copies file on PC to a memory card within PLC.
runtime error.
● References
"FileCopyFrom"(4-39 page)
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim PLCFileName As String
Dim PCFileName As String
Dim err As Long
PLCFileName = "Sample"
PCFileName = " C:\Users\Public\Documents\Sample\Test.csv"
err = AxDBCommManager1.MemcardAccess.FileCopyTo(PCFileName, PLCFileName, _
DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBMemFlag.mfOverWriteArrow)
End Sub

 FileState (EX) Method
Obtains file status on a memory card

Communicating Yes
● Syntax
ret = FileState(strPathMemcard, pvLastAccessTime, pvCreationTime, pvLastWriteTime, plFileSize,
plIsDirectory)
（ret = FileStateEx(strPathMemcard, pvLastAccessTime, pvCreationTime, pvLastWriteTime,
4 plFileSize,plIsDirectory)(When using VBScript)）

Specifies file path to obtain status.

* Specifies after (IP address) /MMC. String ("Variant" when
strPathMemcard
When specifying a root directory, specify it in using VBscript.)
double quotation marks ("").
pvLastAccessTime Specifies the last access date/time. Variant
pvCreationTime Specifies created date. Variant
pvLastWriteTime Specifies the last update date. Variant
plFileSize Specifies file size (bytes). Long
Specifies whether to be directory or file (0: file,
plIsDirectory Long
1: directory).
● Explanation
Obtains file status on a memory card within PLC.
runtime error.
● References
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim err As Long
Dim FileName As String
Dim LastAccessTime
Dim CreationTime
Dim LastWriteTime
Dim FileSize As Long
Dim f As Long
FileName = TextBox5.Text
err = AxDBCommManager1.MemcardAccess.FileState(FileName, LastAccessTime, CreationTime, _
LastWriteTime, FileSize, f)
TextBox1.Text = LastAccessTime
TextBox2.Text = CreationTime
TextBox3.Text = LastWriteTime
TextBox4.Text = FileSize
End Sub

 FileDelete Method
Deletes file on a memory card.

Communicating Yes
● Syntax
ret = FileDelete(strPathMemcard, Flag)

ret
strPathMemcard
See "Error Message Lists"(A-10 page).
Specifies file in a memory card to be deleted.
lAxError
String
4
Keyword Value
mfDeleteExceptReadOnly 3 Restricts deleting when a deleted file is ReadOnly.
mfDeleteForce 2 Allows deleting when a deleted file is ReadOnly.
● Explanation
Deletes files on a memory card within PLC.
runtime error.
● References
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim err As Long
FileName = "Test.csv"
err = AxDBCommManager1.MemcardAccess.FileDelete(FileName, _
DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBMemFlag.mfDeleteForce)
End Sub

 Rename Method
Rename file name on a memory card.

Communicating Yes
● Syntax
ret = Rename(strFileName, strNewFileName)
4 ret
strFileName
Specifies the current file name.
lAxError
String
Specifies a file name after modification.

strNewFileName String
● Explanation
Rename file on a memory card within PLC.
runtime error.
● References
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim err As Long
Dim OldFileName As String
Dim NewFileName As String
OldFileName = "Test.csv"
NewFileName = "Test0614.csv"
err = AxDBCommManager1.MemcardAccess.Rename(OldFileName, NewFileName)
End Sub

 MakeDirectory Method
Creates directory on a memory card.

Communicating Yes
● Syntax
ret = MakeDirectory(strPathDirectory)

ret
strPathDirectory
Specifies directory path to be created.
lAxError
String
4
● Explanation
Creates directory on a memory card within PLC.
runtime error.
● References
"RemoveDirectory"(4-46 page)
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim err As Long
err = AxDBCommManager1.MemcardAccess.MakeDirectory("Sample")
End Sub

 RemoveDirectory Method
Removes directory on a memory card.

Communicating Yes
● Syntax
ret = RemoveDirectory(strPathDirectory, Flag)
4 ret See "Error Message Lists"(A-10 page).

Specifies directory path to be removed.
lAxError

strPathDirectory String
When specifying a root directory, specify it in


mfDeleteEmpty 4 Deletes if directory to be deleted is empty.
Deletes if there is no ReadOnly file or folder in directory to be
mfDeleteExceptReadOnly 3
deleted.
Deletes if there is or not ReadOnly file or folder in directory to
mfDeleteForce 2
be deleted.
● Explanation
Removes directory on a memory card within PLC.
runtime error.
● References
"MakeDirectory"(4-45 page)
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim err As Long
err = AxDBCommManager1.MemcardAccess.RemoveDirectory _
("Sample",DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBMemFlag.mfDeleteEmpty)
End Sub

 RefleshFileListInDirectory (EX) Method
Obtains the number of files and file name included in directory of a memory card and updates the file
list.

Communicating Yes
● Syntax
ret = RefleshFileListInDirectory(strPathDirectory, lCount)
(ret = RefleshFileListInDirectoryEx(strPathDirectory, lCount)(When using VBScript))

Specifies directory path on a memory card.
* Specifies after (IP address) /MMC. String ("Variant" when
strPathDirectory
When specifying a root directory, specify it in using VBscript.)
lCount Specifies the number of files. Long
● Explanation
Obtains the number of files and file name included in directory of a memory card within PLC and
updates the file list. Use FileNamesInDirectory method to actually obtain file name from the updated file
list.
runtime error.
● References
"FileNamesInDirectory (EX)"(4-48 page)
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim err As Long
Dim FileCount As Long
err = AxDBCommManager1.MemcardAccess.RefleshFileListInDirectory("Sample", FileCount)

err = AxDBCommManager1.MemcardAccess.FileNamesInDirectory("Sample", 1, FileName)
End Sub

 FileNamesInDirectory (EX) Method
Obtains file name included in directory on a memory card.

Communicating Yes
● Syntax
ret = FileNamesInDirectory(strPathDirectory, lIndex, strFileName)
(ret = FileNamesInDirectoryEx(strPathDirectory, lIndex, strFileName)(When using VBScript))

4 ret See "Error Message Lists"(A-10 page). lAxError
Specifies directory path on memory card.
* Specifies after (IP address) /MMC. String ("Variant" when using

strPathDirectory
When specifying a root directory, specify it in VBscript.)
lIndex Specifies index of files. Long
String ("Variant" when using
strFileName Sets file name.
VBscript.)
● Explanation
Obtains file name included in directory on a memory card within PLC. Because
RefleshFileListInDirectory is used to obtain file name from the updated file list, execute
RefleshFileListInDirectory method before executing FileNamesInDirectory method.
runtime error.
● References
"RefleshFileListInDirectory (EX)"(4-47 page)
● Usage Example
See usage example of "RefleshFileListInDirectory (EX)"(4-47 page).

 Space Method
Obtains free space of a memory card.

Communicating Yes
● Syntax
ret = Space(lHiTotalSize, lLowTotalSize, lHiFreeSize, lLowFreeSize)
ret
See
page).
"Error Message Lists"(A-10
lAxError
4
lHiTotalSize Specifies total space (high 32 bit). Long
lLowTotalSize Specifies total space (low 32 bit). Long
lHiFreeSize Specifies free space (high 32 bit). Long
lLowFreeSize Specifies free space (low 32 bit). Long
● Explanation
Obtains total and free space of a memory card within PLC by byte.
runtime error.
● References
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim err As Long
Dim a As Long
Dim b As Long
Dim c As Long
Dim d As Long
err = AxDBCommManager1.MemcardAccess.Space(a, b, c, d)
TextBox1.Text = b / 1024 / 1024
TextBox2.Text = d / 1024 / 1024
End Sub

DBDeviceManager
DBDeviceManager Object
Properties
 CommManager Property
Obtains or sets referred Commanagement object (DBCommManager).

Reference This property can also set in the property page.
"Communication manager Object"(3-23 page)
4 Communication status
Communication suspended
Value acquisition
Yes
Value setting
Yes
Communicating Yes Yes
● Syntax
When obtaining: Set dbcomm=DBDeviceManager. CommManager
When setting: Set DBDeviceManager. CommManager = dbcomm

dbcomm Commanagement object Object
● Explanation
Obtains or sets referred Commanagement object.
ReadAll and WriteAll methods are executed to the connected equipment that object specified with this
property communicate with.
Use GetOcx* method when referring to control object.
Device is converted when configuration is changed.
For more information, see "Model Change"(A-9 page).
* Use object property if you use Visual Basic 6.0.
● References
"Peer"(4-21 page)
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim dbcomm As Object
dbcomm = AxDBDeviceManager1.CommManager
'If communicating with the connected equipment of DBCommManager1, connection determination is
changed to
‘ the connected equipment of DBCommManager2.
If dbcomm Is AxDBCommManager1.GetOcx Then
AxDBDeviceManager1.CommManager = AxDBCommManager2.GetOcx
ElseIf dbcomm Is AxDBCommManager2.GetOcx Then
AxDBDeviceManager1.CommManager = AxDBCommManager1.GetOcx
End If
End Sub

DBDeviceManager
 Devices Property
Obtains DBDevices collection but does not set them.

● Syntax
Set devices=DBDeviceManager.Devices

devices DBDevice collection DBDevices
4
● Explanation
Obtains DBDevices collection but does not set them.
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim Devices As DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBDevices
Dim Device As DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBDevice
'Add DBDevices collection.
Devices = AxDBDeviceManager1.Devices
Device = Devices.Add(DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBPlcDevice.DKV5000_DM, "0")
End Sub

DBDeviceManager
 TriggerRead Property
Obtains or sets a trigger when reading.

Reference This property can also be set in the property page.
"Trigger"(3-29 page)

● Syntax
4 When obtaining: Set trigger= DBDeviceManager.TriggerRead

When setting: Set DBDeviceManager.TriggerRead = trigger

trigger DBTrigger object for reading DBTrigger
● Explanation
Obtains or sets DBTrigger object as a read trigger.
If conditions of the specified trigger are met, device value is read accordingly.
● References
"BeforeRead"(4-58 page)
"AfterRead"(4-59 page)
"Param"(4-97 page)
“DBTrigger.Fire” (4-104 page)
● Usage Example
Private Sub Button1_Click(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As System.EventArgs) Handles Button1.Click

Dim Trigger As DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBTrigger
Trigger = AxDBDeviceManager1.TriggerRead
If Trigger Is Nothing Then
Call MsgBox("TriggerRead is empty")
Exit Sub
End If
If Trigger.Type = DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBAxTriggerType.ttInterval Then
Call MsgBox("TriggerRead is Interval Trigger")
Else
Call MsgBox("TriggerRead is not Interval Trigger")
End If
End Sub

DBDeviceManager
 TriggerWrite Property
Obtains or sets a trigger when writing.


"Trigger"(3-29 page)

● Syntax
When obtaining: Set trigger = DBDeviceManager.TriggerWrite
When setting: Set DBDeviceManager.TriggerWrite = trigger 4
trigger DBTrigger object for writing DBTrigger
● Explanation
Obtains or sets DBTrigger object as a write trigger.
If conditions of the specified trigger is met, device value is written accordingly.
● References
"Param"(4-97 page)
● Usage Example

Trigger = AxDBDeviceManager1.TriggerWrite
If Trigger Is Nothing Then
Call MsgBox("TriggerWrite is empty")
Exit Sub
End If
If Trigger.Type = DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBAxTriggerType.ttInterval Then
Call MsgBox("TriggerWrite is Interval Trigger")
Else
Call MsgBox("TriggerWrite is not Interval Trigger")
End If
End Sub

DBDeviceManager
Methods
 IsReading Methods
Obtains whether object is being read asynchronously.

Communication suspended Yes (always False)
Communicating Yes
● Syntax
4 value = DBDeviceManager.IsReading

Boolean value to indicate asynchronous

value Boolean
read
Value for ‘value’
Keyword Description
True Reading asynchronously
False Not reading asynchronously
● Explanation
Indicates whether object is being read asynchronously.
● Usage Example

If AxDBDeviceManager1.IsReading = True Then
Call MsgBox(" Reading")
Else
Call MsgBox(" Not reading")
End If
End Sub

DBDeviceManager
 IsWriting Method
Obtains whether object is being written asynchronously.

Communication suspended Yes (always False)
Communicating Yes
● Syntax
value = DBDeviceManager.IsWriting
value
Boolean value to indicate asynchronous
writing
Boolean
4
Keyword Description
True Writing asynchronously
False Not writing asynchronously
● Explanation
Indicates whether object is being written asynchronously.
● Usage Example

If AxDBDeviceManager1.IsWriting = True Then
Call MsgBox(" Writing")
Else
Call MsgBox("not writing")
End If
End Sub

DBDeviceManager
 ReadAll Method
Reads values of registered device from the connected equipment.


Communicating Yes
● Syntax
DBDeviceManager.ReadAll
● Explanation
4 Reads values of device from the connected equipment.

Execution while communication is suspended, Commanagement object (CommManager) is not
registered, or a problem occurs at the time of execution results in runtime error.

No "Error" event occurs when runtime error occurs.
● References
"CommManager"(4-50 page)
"WriteAll"(4-57 page)
"Error"(4-62 page)
● Usage Example

AxDBDeviceManager1.ReadAll()
End Sub

DBDeviceManager
 WriteAll Methods
Writes specified values into each registered device of the connected equipment.

Communicating Yes
● Syntax
DBDeviceManager.WriteAll
● Explanation
Writes values of device into the connected equipment.
Works only during communication. 4
Execution while communication is suspended, Commanagement object (CommManager) is not
registered, or a problem occurs at the time of execution results in runtime error.
No "Error" event occurs if runtime error occurs.
Use ValueWrite method of DBDevice object to specify device value.
● References
"ReadAll"(4-56 page)
“DBDevice.BeforeWrite” (4-60 page)
"AfterWrite"(4-61 page)
"Error"(4-62 page)
“DBDevice.ValueWrite” (4-76 page)
● Usage Example

AxDBDeviceManager1.WriteAll()
End Sub

DBDeviceManager
Events
 BeforeRead Event
Occurs at the occurrence of a read trigger and execution of ReadAll method before performing actual
read process to the connected equipment.
● Syntax
Sub DBDeviceManager_BeforeRead()
● Explanation
Occurs at the occurrence of a read trigger and execution of ReadAll method before performing actual
4 read process to the connected equipment.
● References
"TriggerRead"(4-52 page)
● Usage Example
Private Sub AxDBDeviceManager1_BeforeRead(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As System.EventArgs) _

Handles AxDBDeviceManager1.BeforeRead
If (AxDBDeviceManager1.Devices.Count > 500) Then
MsgBox(" Communication cycle becomes long due to too many registered devices. ", _
MsgBoxStyle.OkOnly)
End If
End Sub

DBDeviceManager
 AfterRead Event
Occurs after reading values of registered device from the connected equipment.
● Syntax

Sub DBDeviceManager_AfterRead()
● Explanation
Occurs after reading values of registered device from the connected equipment.
DBDeviceManager.Error event occurs when a device not contained in the connected equipment is
included as the device to be read.
● References
"BeforeRead"(4-58 page) 4
"TriggerRead"(4-52 page)
"Error"(4-62 page)
● Usage Example

MsgBox(AxDBDeviceManager1.Devices.Item(1).ValueRead)
End Sub

DBDeviceManager
 BeforeWrite Event
Occurs at the occurrence of a write trigger and execution of WriteAll method before performing actual
● Syntax
Sub DBDeviceManager_BeforeWrite()
● Explanation
Occurs at the occurrence of a write trigger and execution of WriteAll method before performing actual
● References
4 "AfterWrite"(4-61 page)
"TriggerWrite"(4-53 page)
● Usage Example
Private Sub AxDBDeviceManager1_BeforeWrite(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As System.EventArgs) _

Handles AxDBDeviceManager1.BeforeWrite
AxDBDeviceManager1.Devices.Item(1).ValueWrite = 1000
End Sub
Private Sub AxDBDeviceManager1_AfterWrite(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As System.EventArgs) _

Handles AxDBDeviceManager1.AfterWrite
MsgBox(" Writing completed")
End Sub

DBDeviceManager
 AfterWrite Events
Occurs after writing values to registered device of the connected equipment.
● Syntax

Sub DBDeviceManager_AfterWrite()
● Explanation
Occurs after writing device values from the connected equipment.
DBDeviceManager.Error event occurs when device not contained in the connected equipment is
included as the device to be written.
● References
“DBDevice.BeforeWrite” (4-60 page) 4
"TriggerWrite"(4-53 page)
"Error"(4-62 page)
● Usage Example
See usage example of “DBDevice.BeforeWrite” (4-60 page).

DBDeviceManager
 Error Event
Occurs when error occurs during process of asynchronous read/write with the connected equipment.
● Syntax
Sub DBDeviceManager_Error(lErrkind,lErrcode)

lErrkind Error type lAxErr
lErrcode Error number Long
Value for lAxErr
4 Constant Value Description

aeDericeManagerRead 1 Read process error
aeDericeManagerWrite 2 Write process error
● Explanation
Occurs when error occurs during process of asynchronous read/write with the connected equipment.
For details on error number and description, see "Error Message Lists"(A-10 page).
● References
● Usage Example
Private Sub AxDBDeviceManager1_Error(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As _

AxDATABUILDERAXLibLB._IDBDeviceManagerEvents_ErrorEvent) Handles _
AxDBDeviceManager1.Error
If sender = 1 Then
MsgBox(" Error during read process. Error number: " & e.ToString)
Else
MsgBox(" Error during write process. Error number: " & e.ToString)
End If
End Sub

DBDevices Object
Properties

 Count Property
Obtains the number of devices included in collection but cannot set.

4
● Syntax
value = DBDevices.Count

value The number of devices Long
● Explanation
Obtains the number of devices included in collection but cannot set.
● Usage Example
See usage example in “DBDevice.BeforeWrite” (4-60 page).

 Item Property
Obtains device registered for the specified index.


● Syntax
Set device = Item(index)
or
Set device = DBDevices(index)
4 Value Description Type

device DBDevice object DBDevice
index Index Long
● Explanation
Obtains device where index identifies.
The beginning of index is 1.
Runtime error occurs if index out of range is specified or if device is not registered.
● Usage Example
Function DBDevicesGetSetting(ByVal Devices As DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBDevices) As String

Dim DeviceNum As Integer
Dim iCounter As Integer
Dim strDevices As String
DeviceNum = Devices.Count
strDevices = "DBDevices information= " + Str(DeviceNum) + vbCrLf
For iCounter = 1 To DeviceNum
strDevices = strDevices + "Index = " + Str(iCounter) + vbCrLf
Device = Devices.Item(iCounter)
strDevices = strDevices + Device.Name + vbCrLf
Next
DBDevicesGetSetting = strDevices
End Function

Button1.Click
Dim corDev As DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBDevices
corDev = AxDBDeviceManager1.Devices
MsgBox(DBDevicesGetSetting(corDev).ToString)
End Sub

Methods
 Add Methods

Adds a new device.
Reference This method can be executed during designing in the property page.
"Addition of device"(3-25 page)

Communicating Yes
4
● Syntax
Set device = DBDevices.Add(kind, no)

Device object for asynchronously
device DBDevice
reading/writing
kind Device type DBPlcDevice
no Device number String
● Explanation
Generates a device.
Can only generate a device of the connected equipment identified by PLC property of
Commanagement object referred by CommManager property of DBDeviceManager object.
Runtime error occurs if CommManager property is not set or if device type or number not contained in
the connected equipment is specified.
* Add method cannot be used for DBDevice object of DBRTLoggingManager. Use AddRTL method instead.
● References
"PLC"(4-19 page)
“DBDevices.Remove” (4-67 page)
"Insert"(4-66 page)
“DBDevices.Item” (4-64 page)
“DBDevices.Count” (4-63 page)
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Device = AxDBDeviceManager1.Devices.Add(DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBPlcDevice.DKV5000_DM, _
"0")
Device.ReadEnabled = True
Device.WriteEnabled = False
End Sub

 Insert Method
Inserts a device into specified index.


Communicating Yes
● Syntax
Set device = DBDevices.Insert(index, kind, no)
4 device
Device object for asynchronously
reading/writing
DBDevice
index Index Long


● Explanation
Generates and inserts a device into the place identified by index.
Beginning of index is 1. If index is 1 or smaller, the device is inserted at the beginning. If index is larger
than the number of devices (obtained by Count property), it is inserted at the end.
Commanagement object referred by CommManager property of DBDeviceManager object.
* Insert method cannot be used for DBDevice object of DBRTLoggingManager. Use InsertRTL method
instead.
● References
"PLC"(4-19 page)
“DBDevices.Add” (4-65 page)
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Device = AxDBDeviceManager1.Devices.Insert(0, _
DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBPlcDevice.DKV5000_DM, "0")
End Sub

 Remove Method
Removes the specified device.


"Deletion of device"(3-28 page)

Communicating Yes
● Syntax
Remove device
4
Device object for asynchronous reading/
device DBDevice
writing
● Explanation
Removes the specified device.
Runtime error occurs if device created by other DBDevices object is specified.
● References
"Insert"(4-66 page)
“DBDevices.Clear” (4-68 page)
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim Devices As DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBDevices
Devices = AxDBDeviceManager1.Devices
Device = Devices.Item(1)
Call Devices.Remove(Device)
End Sub

 Clear Method
Removes all devices.

"Deletion of all devices"(3-28 page)

Communicating Yes
● Syntax
4 Clear
● Explanation
Removes all devices.
● References
"Insert"(4-66 page)
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
AxDBDeviceManager1.Devices.Clear()
End Sub

 AddRTL Method
Adds a new device used for real time logging.



Communicating Yes
● Syntax
Set device=DBDevices.AddRTL(PlcDevice,strNo,RTLDataSize,DeviceType,DispType,Reserved)

4
device Device object DBDevice
PlcDevice Device type DBPlcDevice or Long
strNo Device number String
RTLDataSize Device length Integer
DeviceType Device type Integer
DispType Display type Integer
Reserved System reservation (0) Long

Value for DeviceType

dtBit 0 Bit device
dtWord 1 Word device
dtDWord 2 Double word device
Value for DispType

dtBitVal 1 Bit (0/1)
dtSigned 11 Binary with sign
dtUnsigned 12 Binary without sign
dtHEX 13 HEX
dtFloat 16 Floating point real number
● Explanation
Generates a device used for real time logging.
Commanagement object referred by CommManager property of DBRTLoggingManager object.
* AddRTL method cannot be used for DBDevice object of DBDeviceManager. Use Add method instead.

● References
"PLC"(4-19 page)

“DBDevices.InsertRTL” (4-71 page)
● Usage Example

4 Button1.Click
Device = AxDBRTLoggingManager1.Devices.AddRTL _
(DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBPlcDevice.DKV5000_DM, "0",1,1,11,0)
End Sub

 InsertRTL Method
Inserts a device used for real time logging into the specified index.


Communicating Yes
● Syntax
Set device=DBDevices.InsertRTL(Idx,PlcDevice,strNo,RTLDataSize,DeviceType,DispType,Reserved)

4
device Device object DBDevice
Idx Index Long
PlcDevice Device type DBPlcDevice or Long
strNo Device number String
RTLDataSize Device length Integer
DeviceType Device type Integer
DispType Display type Integer
Reserved System reservation Long


dtBit 0 Bit device
dtWord 1 Word device
dtDWord 2 Double word device
Value for DispType

dtBitVal 1 Bit (0/1)
dtSigned 11 Binary with sign
dtUnsigned 12 Binary without sign
dtHEX 13 HEX

DBDeviceManager DB Devices
● Explanation
Generates and inserts a device used for real time logging into the place identified by index.
Beginning of index is 1. If index is 1 or smaller, the device is inserted at the beginning. If index is larger
than the number of devices (obtained by Count property), it is inserted at the end.
Commanagement object referred by CommManager property of DBRTLoggingManager object.
* InsertRTL method cannot be used for DBDevice object of DBDeviceManager. Use Insert method instead.
● References
4 "PLC"(4-19 page)
“DBDevices.AddRTL” (4-69 page)

● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Device = AxDBRTLoggingManager1.Devices.InsertRTL _
(0,DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBPlcDevice.DKV5000_DM, "0",1,1,11,0)
End Sub

DBDeviceManager DB Devices DBDevice
DBDevice Object
Properties

 Kind Property
Obtains device type but cannot set.

4
● Syntax
value = DBDevice.Kind

value Device type DBPlcDevice or Long
● Explanation
Obtains device type but cannot set.
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim DevKind As DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBPlcDevice
Dim strDevNo As String
Dim strDevName As String
Dim strResult As String
Device = AxDBDeviceManager1.Devices.Item(1)
'Read device type.
DevKind = Device.Kind
'Read device.
strDevNo = Device.No
'Read device type and device.
strDevName = Device.Name
strResult = Str(DevKind) + " " + strDevNo + " " + strDevName
Call MsgBox(strResult)
End Sub

DBDeviceManager DB Devices DBDevice
 No Property
Obtains device number but cannot set it.


● Syntax
text = DBDevice.No
4 text Device number String
● Explanation
Obtains device number but cannot set it.
● References
"Kind"(4-73 page)
 Name Property
Obtains a string consisting of the one indicating device type and device number but cannot set it.

● Syntax
text = DBDevice.Name

text Device type + number String
● Explanation
Obtains a string consisting of the one indicating device type and device number but cannot set it.
● References
"Kind"(4-73 page)
● Usage Example
See usage example described in "Kind"(4-73 page).

 ValueRead Property
Obtains device value read from the connected equipment.

● Syntax
value = DBDevice. ValueRead

value Value which is read Long
4
● Explanation
Obtains device value read from the connected equipment but cannot set it.
● References
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim strReadValue As String
Dim strWriteValue As String
Dim strIsValueReadValid As String
'Obtain device set as device manager.
Device = AxDBDeviceManager1.Devices.Item(1)
'Check read value.
strReadValue = Str(Device.ValueRead)
'Check written value.
strWriteValue = Str(Device.ValueWrite)
'Check whether it is read data or not.
If (Device.IsValueReadValid = True) Then
strIsValueReadValid = "ReadValue is Valid"
Else
strIsValueReadValid = "ReadValue is Invalid"
End If
Call MsgBox(strReadValue + vbCrLf + strWriteValue + vbCrLf + strIsValueReadValid)
End Sub

 ValueWrite Property
Obtains or sets values written into device.


● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBDevice. ValueWrite
When setting: DBDevice. ValueWrite = value

4 value Written value Long
● Explanation
Obtains or sets values written into device.
Configured value is not immediately reflected on the connected equipment, but is written when a write
trigger occurs and WriteAll method of DBDeviceManager object is executed.
● References
● Usage Example
See usage example of "ValueRead"(4-75 page).

 IsValueReadValid Property
Obtains whether the value of ValueRead is actually read from the connected equipment, but cannot set
it.

● Syntax
value = DBDevice. IsValueReadValid
value
Boolean value to indicate whether it is actually
Boolean
4
read
Keyword Description
True Actually read from the connected equipment
False Not actually read from the connected equipment
● Explanation
Identify the validity of ValueRead property. The value is True if it is actually read from the connected
equipment, and it is False if it is the initial value, but cannot set it.
● References
"ValueRead"(4-75 page)
● Usage Example
See usage example in "ValueRead"(4-75 page).

 ReadEnabled Property
Enables and disables reading from the connected equipment.


● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBDevice. ReadEnabled
When setting: DBDevice. ReadEnabled = value

4 value
Boolean value to indicate whether
Boolean
reading is enabled or disabled
Keyword Description
True Enabled
False Disabled
● Explanation
In the reading process of DBDeviceManager, the value is read from the connected equipment if this
value is True, but not if it is False. Only some values of registered device can be read because read
processing of this object can be disabled temporarily by specifying value to False.
● References
"ValueRead"(4-75 page)
● Usage Example
Private Function Device_IsReadEnable(ByVal iItemNo As Integer) As String

Dim strReadEnable As String
Device = AxDBDeviceManager1.Devices.Item(iItemNo)
If (Device.ReadEnabled = True) Then
strReadEnable = "ReadEnable"
Else
strReadEnable = "ReadDisable"
End If
Device_IsReadEnable = strReadEnable
End Function

RadioButton1.Click
TextBox1.Text = Device_IsReadEnable(1)
End Sub

 WriteEnabled Property
Enables and disables writing into the connected equipment.

● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBDevice.WriteEnabled
When setting: DBDevice.WriteEnabled = value
value
Boolean value to indicate whether writing
Boolean
4
is enabled or disabled
Keyword Description
True Enabled
False Disabled
● Explanation
In the writing process of DBDeviceManager, value is written into the connected equipment if this value
is True, but not if it is False. Only some values of registered device can be written because writing
process of this object can be disabled temporarily by specifying value to False.
● References
“DBDevice.ValueWrite” (4-76 page)
● Usage Example
Private Function Device_IsWriteEnable(ByVal iItemNo As Integer) As String

Dim strWriteEnable As String
Device = AxDBDeviceManager1.Devices.Item(iItemNo)
If (Device.WriteEnabled = True) Then
strWriteEnable = "WriteEnable"
Else
strWriteEnable = "WriteDisable"
End If
Device_IsWriteEnable = strWriteEnable
End Function

RadioButton1.Click
TextBox1.Text = Device_IsWriteEnable(1)
End Sub

 RTLDataSize Property
Obtains data size of the device used for real time logging.


● Syntax
When obtaining: value=DBDevice.RTLDataSize
4 value Value to indicate data size Integer

Value Description
1 One word
2 Two words
● Explanation
Obtains data size of the device but cannot set it.
● References
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim sDataSize As Short
Dim sDataType As Integer
Dim sDispType As integer
Dim sRTLManagerIdx As Integer
sDataSize = AxDBRTLoggingManager1.Devices.Item(1).RTLDataSize
sDataType = AxDBRTLoggingManager1.Devices.Item(1).RTLDataType
sDispType = AxDBRTLoggingManager1.Devices.Item(1).RTLDispType
sRTLManagerIdx = AxDBRTLoggingManager1.Devices.Item(1).RTLManageIndex
End Sub

 RTLDataType Property
Obtains data type of the device used for real time logging.

● Syntax
When obtaining: value=DBDevice.RTLDataType

value Value to indicate data type Integer
4
dtBit 0 Bit device
dtWord 1 Word device (16-bit)
dtDWord 2 Device (32-bit)
● Explanation
Obtains data type of the device but cannot set it.
● References
● Usage Example
See usage example of "RTLDataSize"(4-80 page).

 RTLDispType Property
Obtains display type of the device used for real time logging.


● Syntax
When obtaining: value=DBDevice.RTLDispType
4 value Value to indicate display type Integer


dtBitVal 1 Bit(0/1)
dtSigned 11 Decimal number with sign
dtUnsigned 12 Decimal number without sign
dtHEX 13 Hexadecimal number
● Explanation
Obtains display type of the device but cannot set it.
● References
● Usage Example

 RTLManageIndex Property
Obtains the management ID number used for real time logging.

● Syntax
When obtaining: value=DBDevice.RTLManageIndex

value Management ID Integer
4
● Explanation
Obtains the management ID number of device but cannot set it.
● References
● Usage Example

DBTriggerManager
DBTriggerManager Object
Properties
 Active Property
Obtains or sets whether a trigger is active/inactive.
Active Value acquisition Value setting

True (a trigger is active) Yes Yes
4 False (a trigger is inactive) Yes Yes
● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBTriggerManager.Active

When setting: DBTriggerManager.Active = value

value Whether a trigger is active/inactive Boolean
Keyword Description
True Active
False Inactive
● Explanation
Obtains or sets whether a trigger is active/inactive.
If “True,”a trigger occurs when trigger conditions are met.
If “False,”a trigger does not occur even when trigger conditions are met.
Whether a trigger is active/inactive can be set for entire Triggers collection.
● Usage Example

RadioButton1.Click
If AxDBTriggerManager1.Active Then
AxDBTriggerManager1.Active = False
Else
AxDBTriggerManager1.Active = True
End If
End Sub

DBTriggerManager
 Triggers Property
Obtains DBTriggers collection but cannot set it.

True (active trigger) Yes No
False (inactive trigger) Yes No
● Syntax
Set triggers = DBTriggerManager.Triggers

triggers Object to identify DBTriggers collection DBTriggers
4
● Explanation
Obtains DBTriggers collection. Cannot set it.
DBTriggers collection (object) is a collection of all triggers (DBTrigger) of DBTriggerManager.
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim a As DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBTriggers
a = AxDBTriggerManager1.Triggers
MsgBox(a.Count)
End Sub

DBTriggerManager
Events
 Fire Event
Occurs every time when each trigger condition in DBTriggers collection is met.
● Syntax
Sub DBTriggerManager_Fire( )

pTrigger Trigger object which trigger occurred DBTrigger
4 ● Explanation
Occurs every time when each trigger condition in DBTrigger collection is met.
Can obtain trigger object which trigger occurred.
● References
“DBTrigger.Type” (4-94 page)
● Usage Example
Private Sub AxDBTriggerManager1_Fire(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As _

AxDATABUILDERAXLibLB._IDBTriggerEvents_FireEvent) Handles AxDBTriggerManager1.Fire
'Display name and comment of specified trigger.
MsgBox(e.pTrigger.Name + " " + e.pTrigger.Description)
End Sub

DBTriggerManager DBTriggers
DBTriggers Object
Properties

 Count Property
Obtains the number of triggers included in collection but cannot set it.

4
● Syntax
value = Count

value The number of triggers Long
● Explanation
Obtains the number of triggers included in collection but cannot set it.
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim a As DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBTriggers
a = AxDBTriggerManager1.Triggers
MsgBox(a.Count)
End Sub

 Item Property
Obtains a trigger of specified index.


● Syntax
Set trigger = DBTriggers.Item(index)
or
Set trigger = DBTriggers(index)

trigger Trigger object DBTrigger
index Index of each trigger Long
● Explanation
Obtains a trigger in the place identified by index.
The beginning of index is 1.
Runtime error occurs if index out of range is specified.
● References
“DBTriggers.Add” (4-89 page)
“DBTriggers.Remove” (4-90 page)
“DBTriggers.Count” (4-87 page)
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim iCounter As Integer
Dim Triggers As DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBTriggers
Triggers = AxDBTriggerManager1.Triggers
For iCounter = 1 To Triggers.Count
Trigger = Triggers.Item(iCounter)
'Display name and comment of trigger.
MsgBox(Trigger.Name + " " + Trigger.Description + vbCrLf)
Next
End Sub

Methods
 Add Method

Adds a new trigger.
"Addition of Trigger Setting"(3-9 page)
Active Operation
True (active trigger) Yes
False (inactive trigger) Yes
4
● Syntax
Set trigger = Add(value)

value Trigger type DBAxTriggerType or Long
Trigger type

ttInterval 0 Cycle trigger
ttTimeAt 1 Time trigger
ttTimeSpan 2 Time range trigger
ttLogical 3 Combination trigger
ttCustom 4 Any trigger
ttDevice 5 Device trigger
● Explanation
Adds a new trigger.
● References
“DBTriggers.Clear” (4-91 page)
“DBTriggers.Item” (4-88 page)
“DBTriggers.Count” (4-87 page)
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim NewTrigger As DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBTrigger
NewTrigger = AxDBTriggerManager1.Triggers.Add _
(DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBAxTriggerType.ttInterval)
NewTrigger.Name = "trgInterval"
NewTrigger.Description = "New cycle trigger"
NewTrigger.AsInterval.IntervalMSec = 3500
End Sub

 Remove Method
Removes a trigger.
"Deletion of Trigger Setting"(3-21 page)
Active Operation
● Syntax
4 Remove(trigger)

● Explanation
Removes a trigger.
Runtime error occurs if a trigger created by other DBTriggers object is specified.
● References
“DBTriggers.Clear” (4-91 page)
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim RemoveTrigger As DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBTrigger
RemoveTrigger = AxDBTriggerManager1.Triggers.Item(4)
Call AxDBTriggerManager1.Triggers.Remove(RemoveTrigger)
End Sub

 Clear Method
Removes all triggers.
Active Operation

● Syntax
DBTriggers.Clear
● Explanation
Removes all triggers.
4
● References
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim Answer As Long
Answer = MsgBox(" Do you want to clear all triggers? ", MsgBoxStyle.YesNo)

Select Case Answer
Case vbYes
AxDBTriggerManager1.Triggers.Clear()
Case vbNo
MsgBox("Trigger removal was canceled.")
End Select
End Sub

 FindByName Method
Finds a trigger by name.
Active Operation

● Syntax
Set trigger = DBTriggers.FindByName(name)
4 name
trigger
Name of searched trigger
Trigger object. Nothing is returned if name does not match.
String
DBTrigger
● Explanation
Finds a trigger by name.
Nothing is returned if the name does not match.
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim FindTrigger As DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBTrigger
FindTrigger = AxDBTriggerManager1.Triggers.FindByName(TextBox1.Text)
If FindTrigger Is Nothing Then
Exit Sub
End If
Call MsgBox(" Trigger is found." + FindTrigger.Name)
End Sub

DBTrigger Object
Properties

 Name Property
Obtains or sets trigger name.

Reference This property can also be set in the property page
"Trigger setting for period"(3-10 page)
"Trigger Setting at time and time range"(3-11 page)
"Trigger Setting for device"(3-15 page) 4
"Trigger Setting to combine into already set trigger"(3-18 page)
"Set any trigger"(3-20 page)

True (active trigger) Yes Yes
False (inactive trigger) Yes Yes
● Syntax
When obtaining: text = DBTrigger.Name
When setting: DBTrigger.Name = text
● Explanation
Obtains or sets trigger name.
Duplicated name cannot be specified in a single DBTriggerManager.
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
NewTrigger.Description = " New Cycle Trigger"
NewTrigger.AsInterval.IntervalMSec = 3500
End Sub

 Type Property
Obtains or sets a trigger type.

"Addition of Trigger Setting"(3-9 page)

● Syntax
4 When obtaining: value = Type
When setting: Type =value

trigger Trigger type DBAxTriggerType or Long
"Trigger type"(4-89 page)
● Explanation
Obtains and sets a trigger type.
All trigger conditions set are removed if different type till then is specified.
● References
"Param"(4-97 page)
“DBTrigger.AsInterval” (4-98 page)
"AsTimeAt"(4-99 page)
"AsTimeSpan"(4-100 page)
"AsLogical"(4-101 page)
"AsCustom"(4-102 page)
"AsDevice"(4-103 page)
● Usage Example
Private Sub Trigger_Type(ByVal Index As Integer)

Dim trigger As DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBTrigger
Dim strTrgType As String
trigger = AxDBTriggerManager1.Triggers.Item(Index)
If (trigger.Type = DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBAxTriggerType.ttInterval) Then
strTrgType = " Cycle"
Else
sstrTrgType = " Others"
End If
MsgBox(" Trigger type:" + strTrgType)
End Sub

Button1.Click
Trigger_Type(1)
End Sub

 Description Property
Obtains or sets a trigger comment.


"Trigger Setting for device"(3-15 page)

True (active trigger)
False (inactive trigger)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
4
● Syntax
When obtaining: text = DBTrigger.Description
When setting: DBTrigger.Description = text

text Trigger comment String
● Explanation
Obtains or sets a trigger comment.
● Usage Example
See usage example of "Name"(4-93 page).

 IsOn Property
Obtains trigger status but cannot set it.


● Syntax
value = DBTrigger.IsOn
4 value Trigger status Boolean

Keyword Description
True Trigger condition is met.
False Trigger condition is not met.
● Explanation
Obtains trigger status. Value is True if trigger condition is met, but cannot set it.
● References
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim strMsg As String
If AxDBTriggerManager1.Triggers.Item(1).IsOn = True Then

strMsg = "ON"
Else
strMsg = "OFF"
End If
MsgBox(" Trigger" + strMsg + vbCrLf)
End Sub

 Param Property
Obtains trigger object but cannot set it.

● Syntax
Set trigger = DBTrigger.Param

DBTriggerParamInterval
DBTriggerParamTimeAt 4
DBTriggerParamTimeSpan
trigger Trigger object
● Explanation
Obtains trigger object but cannot set it.
Type of trigger object depends on Type property value of DBTrigger object.
Trigger object can also be obtained by using AsInterval, AsTimeAt, AsTimeSpan, AsLogical, AsCustom,
or AsDevice property.
● References
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim SetMs As Integer
Dim trgInterval As DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBTriggerParamInterval
trgInterval = AxDBTriggerManager1.Triggers.Item(1).Param
SetMs = Integer.Parse(TextBox1.Text)
trgInterval.IntervalMSec = SetMs
End Sub

 AsInterval Property
Obtains cyclic trigger object but cannot set it.


● Syntax
Set trigger = AsInterval
● Explanation
4 Obtains cyclic trigger object but cannot set it.

If trigger type is not cyclic, runtime error occurs.
● References

"Param"(4-97 page)
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim trgInterval As DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBTriggerParamInterval
NewTrigger.Description = " New cyclic trigger"
trgInterval = NewTrigger.AsInterval
trgInterval.IntervalMSec = 3500
End Sub

 AsTimeAt Property
Obtains time trigger object but cannot set it.

● Syntax
Set trigger= DBTrigger.AsTimeAt
● Explanation
Obtains time trigger object but cannot set it.
If trigger type is not time trigger, runtime error occurs. 4
● References
"Param"(4-97 page)
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim trgTimeAt As DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBTriggerParamTimeAt
(DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBAxTriggerType.ttTimeAt)
NewTrigger.Name = "trgTimeAt"
NewTrigger.Description = " New time trigger"
trgTimeAt = NewTrigger.AsTimeAt
trgTimeAt.Year = 2010
trgTimeAt.Month = 6
trgTimeAt.Day = 10
trgTimeAt.Hour = 12
trgTimeAt.Minute = 30
trgTimeAt.Second = 0
trgTimeAt.DayOfWeek = &H8
trgTimeAt.Edge = False
End Sub

 AsTimeSpan Property
Obtains time range trigger object but cannot set it.


● Syntax
Set trigger = DBTrigger.AsTimeSpan
4 trigger Time range trigger object DBTriggerParamTimeSpan
● Explanation
Obtains time range trigger object but cannot set.

If trigger type is not time range trigger, runtime error occurs.
● References
"Param"(4-97 page)
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim trgTimeSpan As DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBTriggerParamTimeSpan
NewTrigger.Name = "trgTimeSpan"
NewTrigger.Description = " New time range trigger"
trgTimeSpan = NewTrigger.AsTimeSpan
trgTimeSpan.TimeFrom = #8:00:00 AM#
trgTimeSpan.TimeTo = #9:45:15 AM#
End Sub

 AsLogical Property
Obtains combination trigger object but cannot set it.

● Syntax
Set trigger = DBTrigger.AsLogical

trigger Combination trigger object DBTriggerParamLogical
4
● Explanation
Obtains combination trigger object but cannot set it.
If trigger type is not combination trigger, runtime error occurs.
● References
"Param"(4-97 page)
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim trgLogical As DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBTriggerParamLogical
(DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBAxTriggerType.ttLogical)
NewTrigger.Name = "trgLogical"
NewTrigger.Description = " New combination trigger"
trgLogical = NewTrigger.AsLogical
trgLogical.Type = DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBTriggerLogicType.ltAnd
trgLogical.Trigger1 = AxDBTriggerManager1.Triggers.Item(1)
trgLogical.Trigger2 = AxDBTriggerManager1.Triggers.Item(2)
End Sub

 AsCustom Property
Obtains any trigger object but cannot set it.


● Syntax
Set trigger = DBTrigger.AsCustom
4 trigger Any trigger object DBTriggerParamCustom
● Explanation
Obtains any trigger object but cannot set it.

If trigger type is not any trigger, runtime error occurs.
● References
"Param"(4-97 page)
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim trgCustom As DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBTriggerParamCustom
(DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBAxTriggerType.ttCustom)
NewTrigger.Name = "trgCustom"
NewTrigger.Description = " New custom trigger"
trgCustom = NewTrigger.AsCustom
trgCustom.OneShot = True
End Sub

 AsDevice Property
Obtains device trigger object but cannot set it.

● Syntax
Set trigger=DBTrigger.AsDevice

trigger Device trigger object DBTriggerParamDevice
4
● Explanation
Obtains device trigger object but cannot set it.
If trigger type is not device, runtime error occurs.
● References
"Param"(4-97 page)
● Usage Example
Private Sub Button1_Click(ByVal sender As System.Object, ByVal e As System.EventArgs) Handles

Button1.Click
Dim trgDevice As DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBTriggerParamDevice
(DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBAxTriggerType.ttDevice)
NewTrigger.Name = "trgDevice"
NewTrigger.Description = "New device trigger"
trgDevice = NewTrigger.AsDevice
trgDevice.CommManager = AxDBCommManager1.GetOcx
'To use the SetDevice method
trgDevice.SetDevice(DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBPlcDevice.KV5000_MR, "100")
'To use DeviceKind and properties
'trgDevice.DeviceKind = DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBPlcDevice.KV5000_MR
'trgDevice.DeviceNo = "100"
trgDevice.DeviceCondition = 1
trgDevice.TriggerBitReset = True
End Sub

Events
 Fire Events
Occurs when trigger condition is met.
● Syntax
Sub DBTrigger_Fire(ByVal pTrigger As DBTrigger)
Value Description
pTrigger Trigger object which issues event
4 ● Explanation
Occurs every time when trigger condition is met.
● References
"Param"(4-97 page)
● Usage Example
Private WithEvents MyTrigger As DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBTrigger
Private Sub AddMyTrigger()

With AxDBTriggerManager1
MyTrigger = .Triggers.Add(DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBAxTriggerType.ttInterval)
MyTrigger.AsInterval.IntervalMSec = 2000
.Active = True
End With
AxDBTriggerManager1.Active = True
End Sub
Private Sub MyTrigger_Fire(ByVal pTrigger As DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBTrigger) Handles _

MyTrigger.Fire
MsgBox("MyTrigger")
End Sub

DBTriggerManager DBTriggers DBTrigger DBTriggerParamTimeAt
DBTriggerParamInterval Object
Properties

 IntervalMSec Property
Obtains or sets cycle of trigger occurrence by millisecond.

Active
Value acquisition
Yes
Value setting
Yes
4
● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBTriggerParamInterval.IntervalMSec
When setting: DBTriggerParamInterval.IntervalMSec = value

Cycle of trigger occurrence (by
value Long
millisecond)
● Explanation
Obtains or sets cycle of trigger occurrence by millisecond.
When specifying to 0, triggers occur consecutively.
When specifying less than 0, runtime error occurs.
● Usage Example
See usage example of “DBTrigger.AsInterval” (4-98 page).

DBTriggerParamTimeAt Object
Properties
 Year Property
Obtains or sets year condition.

4 Active
Value acquisition
Yes
Value setting
Yes
● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBTriggerParamTimeAt.Year
When setting: DBTriggerParamTimeAt.Year = value

Year condition. When excluding from
value Integer
condition, set to -1.
● Explanation
Obtains or sets year condition.
2000 - 2037 or - 1 can be set.
When setting to -1, this condition is ignored.
Runtime error occurs when value out of range is specified.
● Usage Example
See usage example of “DBTrigger.AsTimeAt” (4-99 page).

 Month Property
Obtains or sets month condition.



● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBTriggerParamTimeAt.Month
When setting: DBTriggerParamTimeAt.Month = value 4
Month condition. When excluding from
value Integer
● Explanation
Obtains or sets month condition.
1 - 12 or - 1 can be set.
● Usage Example

 Day Property
Obtains or sets day condition.


● Syntax
4 When obtaining: value = DBTriggerParamTimeAt.Day

When setting: DBTriggerParamTimeAt.Day = value

Day condition. When excluding from

value Integer
● Explanation
Obtains or sets day condition.
● Usage Example
See usage example of "AsTimeAt"(4-99 page).

 Hour Property
Obtains or sets hour condition.



● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBTriggerParamTimeAt.Hour
When setting: DBTriggerParamTimeAt.Hour = value 4
Hour condition. When excluding from
value Integer
● Explanation
Obtains or sets hour condition.
● Usage Example

 Minute Property
Obtains or sets minute condition.


● Syntax
4 When obtaining: value = DBTriggerParamTimeAt.Minute

When setting: DBTriggerParamTimeAt.Minute = value

Minute condition. When excluding from

value Integer
● Explanation
Obtains or sets minute condition.
● Usage Example

 Second Property
Obtains or sets second condition.



● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBTriggerParamTimeAt.Second
When setting: DBTriggerParamTimeAt.Second = value 4
Second condition. When excluding from
value Integer
● Explanation
Obtains or sets second condition.
● Usage Example

 DayOfWeek Property
Obtains or sets day of week condition.


● Syntax
4 When obtaining: value = DBTriggerParamTimeAt.DayOfWeek

When setting: DBTriggerParamTimeAt.DayOfWeek = value

Day of week condition. If excluding from

value DBDayOfWeek or Long
● Explanation
Obtains or sets day of week condition.
Values are the combinations below (OR specification):
Constant Value Day of week

dowSun &H1 Sunday
dowMon &H2 Monday
dowTue &H4 Tuesday
dowWed &H8 Wednesday
dowThu &H10 Thursday
dowFri &H20 Friday
dowSat &H40 Saturday

● Usage Example

 Edge Property
Obtains or sets condition of trigger occurrence (edge or level).



● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBTriggerParamTimeAt.Edge
When setting: DBTriggerParamTimeAt.Edge = value 4
value Condition of trigger occurrence (edge or level) Boolean
Keyword Description
True Trigger occurs only once when specified time condition is met.
Triggers occur consecutively as long as specified time
False
condition is met.
● Explanation
Obtains or sets condition of trigger occurrence (edge or level).
In True, trigger occurs only once when specified time condition is met (edge).
In False, triggers occur consecutively as long as specified time condition is met (level).
● Usage Example

DBTriggerParamTimeSpan Object
Properties
 TimeFrom Property
Specifies start time of trigger occurrence.

4 Active
Value acquisition
Yes
Value setting
Yes
● Syntax
When obtaining: time = DBTriggerParamTimeSpan.TimeFrom
When setting: DBTriggerParamTimeSpan.TimeFrom = time

time Start time of trigger occurrence Variant
Format of time
For Date: #a:b:c#
For String: "a:b:c"
a - Hour (0 - 23)
b - Minute (0 - 59)
c - Second (0 - 59)
● Explanation
Specifies start time of trigger occurrence.
Start time of trigger occurrence includes time specified with TimeFrom property.
When time after TimeTo is specified, trigger occurs until TimeTo time of the next day is reached.
Runtime error occurs when invalid value as time specification is specified.
● References
"TimeTo"(4-115 page)
● Usage Example

 TimeTo Property
Specifies end time of trigger occurrence.



● Syntax
When obtaining: time = DBTriggerParamTimeSpan.TimeTo
When setting: DBTriggerParamTimeSpan.TimeTo = time 4
time End time of trigger occurrence Variant
Format of time
For Date: #a:b:c#
For String: "a:b:c"
a - Hour (0 - 23)
b - Minute (0 - 59)
c - Second (0 - 59)
● Explanation
Specifies end time of trigger occurrence.
End time of trigger occurrence includes time specified with TimeTo property.
When time before TimeFrom is specified, trigger occurs until TimeFrom time of the next day is reached.
Runtime error occurs when invalid value as time specification is specified.
● References
"TimeFrom"(4-114 page)
● Usage Example

DBTriggerManager DBTriggers DBTrigger DBTriggerParamLogical
DBTriggerParamLogical Object
Properties
 Type Property
Specifies logic condition of combination

4 Active
Value acquisition
Yes
Value setting
Yes
● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBTriggerParamLogical.Type
When setting: DBTriggerParamLogical.Type = value

DBTriggerLogicType or
value Type of combination
Long
Type of combination

ltAnd 0 Trigger occurs as long as both Trigger1 and Trigger2 are ON.
ltOr 1 Trigger occurs as long as Trigger1, Trigger2 or both are ON.
ltNot 2 Trigger occurs as long as Trigger1 is OFF. Trigger2 is ignored.
● References
"Trigger1"(4-117 page)
● Explanation
Specifies type of combination.
When combination type is ltAnd, both Trigger1 and Trigger2 are set.
When either of them is set, trigger does not occur.
For ltOr, either of Trigger1 or Trigger2 property, or both are set.
For ltNot, Trigger1 property is set. Trigger2 property is ignored.
Exception error occurs when invalid value as type is specified.
● Usage Example
See usage example of “DBTrigger.AsLogical” (4-101 page).

 Trigger1 Property
Obtains or sets trigger1 to be combined.



● Syntax
When obtaining: trigger = DBTriggerParamLogical.Trigger1
When setting: DBTriggerParamLogical.Trigger1= trigger 4
trigger Trigger to be combined DBTrigger
● Explanation
Specifies the first trigger to be combined.
Be sure to specify this if combination type of Type property is ltAnd or ltNot.
● References
“DBTriggerParamLogical.Type” (4-94 page)
● Usage Example

 Trigger2 Property
Obtains or sets trigger2 to be combined.


● Syntax
4 When obtaining: trigger = DBTriggerParamLogical.Trigger2

When setting: DBTriggerParamLogical.Trigger2= trigger

trigger Trigger to be combined DBTrigger
● Explanation
Specifies the second trigger to be combined.
Be sure to specify this if combination type of Type property is ltAnd.
If ltNot, this property is ignored.
● References
“DBTriggerParamLogical.Type” (4-94 page)
● Usage Example

DBTriggerParamCustom Object
Properties

 OneShot Property
Obtains or sets automatic OFF setting of trigger.

Active
Value acquisition
Yes
Value setting
Yes
4
● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBTriggerParamCustom.OneShot
When setting: DBTriggerParamCustom.OneShot = value

Obtains or sets automatic OFF setting of
value Boolean
trigger.
Keyword Description
True Sets automatic OFF of trigger.
False Does not set automatic OFF of trigger.
● Explanation
Controls trigger after SetState method turns trigger ON.
In True, trigger becomes OFF immediately after Fire event occurs.
In False, triggers occur consecutively until SetState method turns trigger OFF.
● References
"TimeTo"(4-115 page)
● Usage Example
See usage example of “DBTrigger.AsCustom” (4-102 page).

Methods
 SetState Method
Sets status of any trigger.
Active Operation
● Syntax
4 DBTriggerParamCustom. SetState value

value Specifies trigger status. Boolean
Keyword Description
True Sets status of any trigger ON.
False Sets status of any trigger OFF.
● Explanation
Sets status of any trigger.
When setting to True, trigger status is set to ON and trigger occurs.
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim trgCustom As DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBTriggerParamCustom
trgCustom = AxDBTriggerManager1.Triggers.Item(1).AsCustom
Call trgCustom.SetState(True)
End Sub

DBTriggerParamDevice Object
Properties


Communication status
Value acquisition
Yes
Value setting
Yes
4
● Syntax
When obtaining: Set dbcomm=DBTriggerParamDevice.CommManager
When setting: Set DBTriggerParamDevice.CommManager=dbcomm

● Explanation
Obtains or sets Commanagement object.
Sets device of the connected equipment which object specified with this property communicates with as
trigger.
When referring control object, use GetOcx * property.
When setting is changed, device is converted.
For more information, see "Model Change"(A-9 page).
* When you use Visual Basic 6.0, use object property.
● References
● Usage Example
See “DBTrigger.AsDevice” (4-103 page).

 DeviceKind Property
Obtains or sets device type.
Point
To set a device, we recommend using the SetDevice method, which checks the device type
and device number.

4 ● Syntax
When obtaining: Set value=DBTriggerParamDevice.DeviceKind
When setting: Set DBTriggerParamDevice.DeviceKind=value

value Device type DBPlcDevice
● Explanation
Obtains or sets device type set as trigger device.
A device specified with this property and DeviceNo property is monitored as trigger device.
● References
"DeviceNo"(4-123 page)
● Usage Example
See usage example of “DBTrigger.AsDevice” (4-103 page).

 DeviceNo Property
Obtains or sets device number.
Point

To set a device, we recommend using the SetDevice method, which checks the device type
and device number.

● Syntax
When obtaining: Set text=DBTriggerParamDevice.DeviceNo
4
When setting: Set DBTriggerParamDevice.DeviceNo=text
text Device number String
● Explanation
Obtains or sets device number set as trigger device.
A device specified with this property and DeviceKind property is monitored as trigger device.
● References
"DeviceKind"(4-122 page)
● Usage Example

 DeviceCondition Property
Obtains or sets device condition.


● Syntax
When obtaining: Set value=DBTriggerParamDevice.DeviceCondition
When setting: Set DBTriggerParamDevice.DeviceCondition=value

4 value Trigger condition Long
Value Status
1 ↑
2 ↓
3 ↑↓
4 ON
5 OFF
● Explanation
Obtains and sets occurrence condition of trigger occurred by bit device status specified with
DeviceKind and DeviceNo properties.
When value out of range is input, runtime error occurs.
● References
● Usage Example

 TriggerBitReset Property
Obtains or sets whether trigger bit should be reset.

● Syntax
When obtaining: Set value=DBTriggerParamDevice.TriggerBitReset
When setting: Set DBTriggerParamDevice. TriggerBitReset =value

value Condition to reset trigger bit Boolean 4
0: Reset trigger bit after trigger occurs.
1: Do not reset trigger bit after trigger occurs.
● Explanation
Obtains or sets whether trigger bit should be reset after trigger condition occurs.
Referred only when trigger condition is " ↑ " or " ↓ ," trigger bit does not be reset for other set value
(OFF if trigger condition is " ↑ ," On if " ↓ ").
● References
"DeviceCondition"(4-124 page)
● Usage Example

 ErrorConnect Property
Obtains connection status, but cannot set it.


● Syntax
When obtaining: Set value=DBTriggerParamDevice.ErrorConnect
4 value Connection error status Boolean

Value Description
True Connection error in DBCommManager
False No connection error in DBCommManager.
● Explanation
Obtains connection status of Commanagement object (DBCommManager), but cannot set it.
True: Connection error occurs.
False: Connection error does not occur.
● References
● Usage Example
Private Sub AxDBTriggerManager1_Error(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As _

AxDATABUILDERAXLibLB._IDBTriggerEvents_ErrorEvent) Handles AxDBTriggerManager1.Error
Dim errConnect As Boolean
errConnect = AxDBTriggerManager1.Triggers(1).AsDevice.ErrorConnect
End Sub

 ClearError Method
Clears communication error status.

Communicating Yes
● Syntax
DBTriggerParamDevice.ClearError
● Explanation
Clears connection error status of Commanagement object (DBCommManager).
Makes status of ErrorConnect property FALSE. 4
● References
"ErrorConnect"(4-126 page)
● Usage Example
Private Sub MyTrigger_Error(ByVal pTrigger As DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBTrigger, ByVal lAxErr As _

DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBAxError) Handles MyTrigger.Error
AxDBTriggerManager1.Triggers.Item(1).AsDevice.ClearError()
End Sub

 SetDevice Method
Sets a trigger device.

Reference This method can be executed during designing in the property page. See 3-15 page.
Operation
Communicating Yes
● Syntax
DBTriggerManager.DBTriggerParamDevice.SetDevice (kind, no)
4 Description Type
● Explanation
Sets a device trigger device.
If the trigger device setting is invalid, a runtime error occurs.
● References
"DeviceNo"(4-123 page)
● Usage Example
See usage example of "DBTrigger.AsDevice" (4-103 page).

 Error Event
Occurs during communication error.

Communicating Yes
● Syntax
Sub DBTrigger_Error(ByVal pTrigger As DBTrigger, ByVal lAxErr As DBAxError)
Value for IAxErr
Constant
aeTriggerManagerRead
Value
4
Description
Reading process error
4
aeTriggerManagerWrite 5 Writing process error
● Explanation
Occurs during communication error status when using device trigger.
● References
"ErrorConnect"(4-126 page)
"ClearError"(4-127 page)
● Usage Example
See usage example of "ClearError"(4-127 page).

DBRTLoggingManager
DBRTLoggingManager Object
Properties

4 Communication status
Value acquisition
Yes
Value setting
Yes
● Syntax
When obtaining: Set dbcomm=DBRTLoggingManager. CommManager
When setting: Set DBRTLoggingManager. CommManager = dbcomm

● Explanation
Obtains or sets Commanagement object.
Real time logging is performed by the connected equipment which object specified with this property
communicates with.
Use GetOcx* property when referring control object.
Device is converted when setting is changed.
For details, see "Model Change"(A-9 page).
* If you use Visual Basic 6.0, use object property.
● References

DBRTLoggingManager
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
AxDBRTLoggingManager1.CommManager = AxDBCommManager1.GetOcx

AxDBRTLoggingManager1.SamplingCycle = _
DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBRTLSamplingCycleSet.SampleCycle_SCAN
With AxDBRTLoggingManager1.TriggerStart.AsDevice
.CommManager = AxDBCommManager1.GetOcx
.DeviceKind = DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBPlcDevice.DKV5000_MR
.DeviceNo = "0"
.DeviceCondition = 1
End With
With AxDBRTLoggingManager1.TriggerStop.AsDevice
4
.CommManager = AxDBCommManager1.GetOcx
.DeviceKind = DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBPlcDevice.DKV5000_MR
.DeviceNo = "0"
.DeviceCondition = 2
End With
AxDBCommManager1.WriteDevice(DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBPlcDevice.DKV5000_MR, "0", 1)
End Sub

Button2.Click
AxDBCommManager1.WriteDevice(DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBPlcDevice.DKV5000_MR, "0", 0)
End Sub

DBRTLoggingManager
 Devices Property
Obtains DBDevices collection.


● Syntax
When obtaining: Set devices = DBRTLoggingManager.Devices
4 device DBDevice collection Devices
● Explanation
Obtains DBDevices collection. Setting is performed by AddRTL and InsertRTL methods of DBDevices
objects.
Up to 128 devices in total of bit devices and word devices can be set.
When trying to set more than the upper limit, error occurs.
● References
"DBDevices Object"(4-5 page)
"DBDevice Object"(4-6 page)
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
AxDBRTLoggingManager1.Devices.AddRTL(DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBPlcDevice.DKV5000_DM, "0", _
1, 1, 11, 0)
End Sub

DBRTLoggingManager
 TriggerStart Property
Obtains and sets a start trigger.

● Syntax
When obtaining: Set trigger = DBRTLoggingManager.TriggerStart
When setting: Set DBRTLoggingManager.TriggerStart = trigger

trigger DBTrigger object to start DBTrigger 4
● Explanation
Obtains or sets DBTrigger object to be trigger to start sampling.
When trigger condition of set trigger is met, real time logging is started accordingly.
When a start trigger occurs, sampling condition is written into PLC.
So time lag occurs until data is actually obtained.
● References
"DBTrigger Object"(4-8 page)
"TriggerStop"(4-134 page)
● Usage Example
See usage example of “DBRTLogging.CommManager” (4-130 page).

DBRTLoggingManager
 TriggerStop Property
Obtains and sets a stop trigger.


● Syntax
When obtaining: Set trigger = DBRTLoggingManager.TriggerStop
When setting: Set DBRTLoggingManager.TriggerStop = trigger

4 trigger DBTrigger object to start stopping DBTrigger
● Explanation
Obtains or sets DBTrigger object to be trigger to finish sampling.
When trigger condition of set trigger is met, real time logging is finished accordingly.
When a stop trigger occurs, finish request is issued to PLC.
● References
"DBTrigger Object"(4-8 page)
"TriggerStart"(4-133 page)
● Usage Example

DBRTLoggingManager
 SamplingCycle Property
Obtains and sets sampling cycle.

During real time logging Yes No
● Syntax
When obtaining: cycle = DBRTLoggingManager.SamplingCycle
When setting: DBRTLoggingManager.SamplingCycle = cycle

cycle Sampling cycle DBRTSamplingCycleSet
Value for cycle

SampleCycle_SCAN 0 SCAN (Depends on PLC scan time)
SampleCycle_1 1 1ms
SampleCycle_2 2 2ms
SampleCycle_5 3 5ms
SampleCycle_10 4 10ms
SampleCycle_1000 12 1s
SampleCycle_TRGD 17 Command trigger (TRGD)
● Explanation
Sets cycle for sampling data in PLC.
This value is set before starting real time logging, and setting cannot be changed during it. Runtime
error occurs when value out of range is entered.
● References
"GetStatus"(4-150 page)
● Usage Example

DBRTLoggingManager
 LastID Property
Obtains ID of obtained data.


● Syntax
When obtaining: id = DBRTLoggingManager.LastID
4 id ID of obtained data Long
● Explanation
For real time logging, data is saved with ID in the order of sampling. Data saved in PLC is read to a PC
by using ReadData method of DBRTLoggingManager.
The largest value of data read to PLC, that is, the last read data is obtained with LastID.
Only sampling data which is not loaded from within PLC can be obtained by combining LastID and
TopID which is the largest value of data saved within PLC, that is, the last saved ID in PLC.
● References
"ReadData"(4-151 page)
"TopID"(4-137 page)
● Usage Example
Private Sub Timer1_Tick(ByVal sender As System.Object, ByVal e As System.EventArgs) Handles _

Timer1.Tick
Dim sTopID As Long
Dim sLastID As Long
Dim err As Integer
Dim i As Integer
Dim LogDataCollection As DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBRTLoggingDataCollection
sTopID = AxDBRTLoggingManager1.TopID
sLastID = AxDBRTLoggingManager1.LastID
If sTopID > 1000 + sLastID Then
err = AxDBRTLoggingManager1.ReadData(sLastID + 1, 1000)
Else
err = AxDBRTLoggingManager1.ReadData(sLastID + 1, sTopID - sLastID)
End If
LogDataCollection = AxDBRTLoggingManager1.LoggingDataCollection
End Sub

DBRTLoggingManager
 TopID Property
Obtains the latest sampled data ID.

● Syntax
When obtaining: id = DBRTLoggingManager.TopID

id Latest data ID Long
4
● Explanation
For real time logging, data is saved with ID in the order of sampling. Data saved in PLC is read to a PC
by using ReadData method of DBRTLoggingManager.
The largest value of data saved in PLC, that is, the last saved ID number within PLC is obtained with
LastID.
Only sampling data which is not loaded from within PLC can be obtained by combining LastID and
TopID which is the largest value of data read into the PC, that is, the last read ID number.
● References
"TopID"(4-137 page)
● Usage Example
See usage example of "LastID"(4-136 page).

DBRTLoggingManager
 TriggerID Property
Obtains ID of data which PLC trigger occurred.


● Syntax
When obtaining: id = DBRTLoggingManager.TriggerID
4 id Data ID which PLC trigger occurs Long
● Explanation
Using triggerID can obtain data of when PLC trigger occurs.
● References
"TopID"(4-137 page)
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim trgID As Long
trgID = AxDBRTLoggingManager1.TriggerID
TextBox1.Text = AxDBRTLoggingManager1.ReadData(trgID, 1)
End Sub

DBRTLoggingManager
 LoggingDataCollection Property
Collection of logging data.

● Syntax
When obtaining: Set DataCollection = DBRTLoggingManager.LoggingDataCollection

DataCollection Logging data collection DBRTLoggingDataCollection
4
● Explanation
Collection of DBRTLoggingData (data block by ReadData).
● References
● Usage Example
See usage example of "LastID"(4-136 page).

DBRTLoggingManager
 TriggerDataRatio Property
Obtains or sets data size (%) after trigger.


● Syntax
When obtaining: Ratio = DBRTLoggingManager. TriggerDataRatio
When setting: DBRTLoggingManager. TriggerDataRatio = Ratio

4 Ratio Data size (%) after trigger Integer
● Explanation
Obtains or sets data size after trigger by 0 - 100 (%). Data score after trigger is calculated with this
number.
● Usage Example

MyBase.Load
AxDBRTLoggingManager1.TriggerDataRatio = 50
AxDBRTLoggingManager1.TrgParamBitEnable1 = True
AxDBRTLoggingManager1.TrgParamBitIndex1 = 1
AxDBRTLoggingManager1.TrgParamBitOn1 = _
DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBRTLBitDeviceOnOffSet.BitDevice_ON
AxDBRTLoggingManager1.TrgParamBitLogicOperator = _
DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBRTLLogicalSet.Logical_AND
AxDBRTLoggingManager1.TrgParamWordLogicOperator = _
DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBRTLLogicalSet.Logical_AND
AxDBRTLoggingManager1.TrgParamWordEnable = True
AxDBRTLoggingManager1.TrgParamWordIndex = 3
AxDBRTLoggingManager1.TrgParamWordCmpOperator = _
DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBRTLCmpOperatorSet.CmpOperator_GREATER
AxDBRTLoggingManager1.TrgParamWordCmpValue = 1000
End Sub

DBRTLoggingManager
 TrgParamBitEnable1 - 4 Property
Sets whether bit device 1-4 available as PLC trigger should be used.

● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBRTLoggingManager.TrgParamBitEnable1
When setting: DBRTLoggingManager.TrgParamBitEnable1 = value

value Whether trigger bit should be used Boolean 4
Constant Description
True Use trigger bit (1 -4).
False Do not use trigger bit (1 -4).
● Explanation
Sets whether trigger bit (1-4) should be used as trigger.
● References
"TrgParamBitIndex1 - 4"(4-142 page)
"TrgParamBitOn1 - 4"(4-143 page)
"TrgParamBitLogicOperator"(4-144 page)
● Usage Example
See usage example of "TriggerDataRatio"(4-140 page).

DBRTLoggingManager
 TrgParamBitIndex1 - 4 Property
Obtains or sets Index number of device used for bit device which can be used as PLC trigger.


● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBRTLoggingManager.TrgParamBitIndex1
When setting: DBRTLoggingManager.TrgParamBitIndex1 = value

4 value Index number Integer
● Explanation
Only the device registered for logging by DBDevice object can be registered for trigger bit of real time
logging. Registers as trigger bit device by using index number of DBDevice object.
● References
● Usage Example

DBRTLoggingManager
 TrgParamBitOn1 - 4 Property
Obtains or sets whether trigger status of bit device 1-4 available as PLC trigger is ON or OFF.

● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBRTLoggingManager.TrgParamBitOn1
When setting: DBRTLoggingManager.TrgParamBitOn1 = value
value
Status to set as trigger
DBRTLBitDeviceOnOffSet
4
(ON/OFF)

BitDevice_ON 1 Trigger condition is met if configured trigger device is ON.
BitDevice_OFF 0 Trigger condition is met if configured trigger device is OFF.
● Explanation
Obtains or sets whether trigger status of bit set as trigger bit is ON or OFF.
● References
"TrgParamBitEnable1 - 4"(4-141 page)
● Usage Example

DBRTLoggingManager
 TrgParamBitLogicOperator Property
Obtains or sets combination condition of bit device 1-4 available as PLC trigger.


● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBRTLoggingManager.TrgParamBitLogicOperator
When setting: DBRTLoggingManager.TrgParamBitLogicOperator = value

4 value
Combination
DBRTLLogicalSet
condition of trigger

Trigger occurs when all conditions of configured trigger device
Logical_AND 0
1 - 4 are met.
Trigger occurs when one condition of configured trigger device
Logical_OR 1
1 - 4 is met.
● Explanation
Obtains or sets combination condition of trigger bit.
● References
"TrgParamBitEnable1 - 4"(4-141 page)
● Usage Example

DBRTLoggingManager
 TrgParamWordLogicOperator Property
Obtains or set combination condition of bit device 1-4 and word device available as PLC trigger.

● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBRTLoggingManager.TrgParamWordLogicOperator
When setting: DBRTLoggingManager.TrgParamWordLogicOperator = value

value Combination condition of trigger DBRTLLogicalSet 4

Operates when both conditions of bit and word devices are
Logical_AND 0
met.
Logical_OR 1 Operates when either condition of bit or word devices is met.
● Explanation
Obtains or sets combination condition of configured trigger bit device and trigger word device.
● References
"TrgParamWordEnable"(4-146 page)
"TrgParamWordIndex"(4-147 page)
"TrgParamWordCmpOperator"(4-148 page)
"TrgParamWordCmpValue"(4-149 page)
● Usage Example

DBRTLoggingManager
 TrgParamWordEnable Property
Obtains or sets whether word device available as PLC trigger should be used.


● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBRTLoggingManager.TrgParamWordEnable
When setting: DBRTLoggingManager.TrgParamWordEnable = value

4 value Whether to set as trigger condition Boolean
True Uses word device.
False Does not use word device.
● Explanation
Obtains or sets whether word device should be used as a trigger.
● References
"TrgParamWordLogicOperator"(4-145 page)
● Usage Example

DBRTLoggingManager
 TrgParamWordIndex Property
Obtains and sets Index number of word device available as PLC trigger.

● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBRTLoggingManager.TrgParamWordIndex()
When setting: DBRTLoggingManager.TrgParamWordIndex() = value

value Index number Short 4
● Explanation
Only the device registered for logging by DBDevice object can be registered as the trigger word device
for real time logging. It is registered as trigger word device by using index number of DBDvice object.
● References
● Usage Example

DBRTLoggingManager
 TrgParamWordCmpOperator Property
Obtains or sets Index number of word device available as PLC trigger.


● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBRTLoggingManager.TrgParamWordCmpOperator
When setting: DBRTLoggingManager.TrgParamWordCmpOperator = value

4 value Condition to compare DBRTLCmpOperatorSet

CmpOperator_EQUAL 0 Trigger is established when matching configured value.
CmpOperator_NEQUAL 1 Trigger is established when different from configured value.
CmpOperator_GREATER 2 Trigger is established when larger than configured value.
Trigger is established when equal to configured value or
CmpOperator_GREATER_EQ 3
larger.
CmpOperator_LESS 4 Trigger is established when smaller than configured value.
Trigger is established when equal to configured value or
CmpOperator_LESS_EQ 5
smaller.
● Explanation
Obtains or sets comparison condition to be trigger condition of word device.
Value to compare with is set by TrgParamWordCmpValue object.
● References
● Usage Example

DBRTLoggingManager
 TrgParamWordCmpValue Property
Obtains or sets value compared with word device available as PLC trigger.

● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBRTLoggingManager.TrgParamWordCmpValue
When setting: DBRTLoggingManager.TrgParamWordCmpValue = value

value Compared configuration value Integer 4
● Explanation
Obtains or sets compared configuration value to be trigger of word device.
Comparison method is set by TrgParamWordCmpOperator object.
● References
● Usage Example

DBRTLoggingManager
Methods
 GetStatus Method
Obtains whether object is under real time logging.

Communicating Yes
● Syntax
4 Status = DBRTLoggingManager. GetStatus

Status Status of real time logging DBRTLoggingStatusSet or Long
Value for Status

STAT_IDLE 0 Idle
STAT_INIT 1 Initializing
STAT_LOGGING 2 Executing real time logging
PLC trigger occurred, data acquisition of data size after trigger
STAT_TRGEND 3
completed
● Explanation
Obtains status of real time logging execution of object.
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim LogStatus As Long
LogStatus = AxDBRTLoggingManager1.GetStatus
If LogStatus = DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBRTLoggingStatusSet.STAT_LOGGING Then
MsgBox(" Executing real time logging")
End If
End Sub

DBRTLoggingManager
 ReadData Method
Obtains specified data.

Communicating Yes
● Syntax
IsSuccess= DBRTLoggingManager.ReadData(startId, count)

IsSuccess Result of ReadData
Data ID at the beginning you want to
Boolean
4
obtain.
startId Long
If specifying 0, the one at the beginning is
obtained first.
count The number of data you want to obtain Long
● Explanation
PLC collects data in the specified cycle of sampling from the beginning of sampling to the end. To
obtain data collected from PC, use ReadData method.
● Usage Example
See usage example of “DBRTLoggingManager.LastID” (4-136 page).

DBRTLoggingManager
 RTLoggingStart Method
Starts real time logging.

Communicating Yes
● Syntax
DBRTLoggingManager.RTLoggingStart
● Explanation
4 Writes sampling condition to PLC and starts real time logging.

Time lag to actual data acquisition occurs after starting.
When sampling of real time chart monitor or other DBRTLoggingManager object is already started to
the same PLC, the first started sampling ends abnormally.

When real time chart monitor or other DBRTLoggingManager object starts sampling after start
sampling, DBRTLoggingManager object stops sampling. When executing GetStatus or ReadData
object when sampling is stopped, error occurs.
Point If communication stops from starting to ending of real time logging, real time logging may
not be executed properly. Do not stop communication from starting to ending of real time
logging.
● References
"RTLoggingStop"(4-153 page)
"GetStatus"(4-150 page)
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
AxDBRTLoggingManager1.RTLoggingStart()
End Sub
‘Communicating (Do not stop communication)
Button2.Click
AxDBRTLoggingManager1.RTLoggingStop()
End Sub

DBRTLoggingManager
 RTLoggingStop Method
Stops real time logging.

Communicating Yes
● Syntax
DBRTLoggingManager. RTLoggingStop
● Explanation
Issues sampling stop request to PLC to stop real time logging.
4
● References
"TriggerStop"(4-134 page)
● Usage Example
See usage example of "TriggerStart"(4-133 page).

DBRTLoggingManager
 GetTrgParamBit Method
Obtains trigger bit setting specified with Index.


Communicating Yes
● Syntax
DBRTLoggingManager.GetTrgParamBit(sIdx, pvbEnable, plSelIdx, psOn)
4 sIdx
pvbEnable
Trigger condition (1 - 4)
Trigger condition, active/inactive flag
Integer
Boolean
Device index
plSelIdx (Index in Devices of device as trigger Long

condition)
psOn Status when trigger condition is met Integer
Value for pvbEnable
True Specified trigger bit is active.
False Specified trigger bit is inactive.
Value for psOn

BitDevice_ON 1 Trigger condition is met when specified trigger device is ON.
BitDevice_OFF 0 Trigger condition is met when specified trigger device is OFF.
● Explanation
Sets bit device to be as PLC trigger condition. Active/inactive trigger condition flag, device index, status
when trigger condition is met (ON/OFF value) can be obtained by specifying Index of condition desire to
obtain.
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim pvbEnable As Boolean
Dim plSelIdx As Long
Dim psOn As Integer
AxDBRTLoggingManager1.GetTrgParamBit(1, pvbEnable, plSelIdx, psOn)

End Sub

DBRTLoggingManager
 SetTrgParamBit Method
Sets trigger bit specified with Index.

Communicating Yes
● Syntax
DBRTLoggingManager.SetTrgParamBit(sIdx, vbEnable, lSelIdx, sOn)

sIdx
vbEnable
Trigger condition index (1 - 4)
Trigger condition, active/inactive flag
Integer
Boolean
4
Device index
lSelIdx (Index in Devices of device as trigger Long
condition)
sOn ON/OFF value Integer
Value for pvbEnable
True Specified trigger bit is active.
False Specified trigger bit is inactive.
Value for sOn

BitDevice_ON 1 Trigger condition is met when specified trigger device is ON.
BitDevice_OFF 0 Trigger condition is met when specified trigger device is OFF.
● Explanation
Sets bit device to be as PLC trigger condition. Active/inactive trigger condition flag, device index, status
when trigger condition is met (ON/OFF value) can be set collectively by specifying Index of condition
you want to obtain.
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
AxDBRTLoggingManager1.SetTrgParamBit(1,True , 2, _
DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBRTLBitDeviceOnOffSet.BitDevice_ON)
End Sub

DBRTLoggingManager
 GetTrgParamWord Method
Obtains setting of trigger word device.


Communicating Yes
● Syntax
DBRTLoggingManager.GetTrgParamWord(pvbEnable, psOpe, psSelIdx, plCmpVal)
4 pvbEnable
psOpe
Word device trigger condition, active/inactive flag
Word device trigger condition, comparison operator
Boolean
Integer
Device index
psSelIdx Integer
(Index in Devices of device as trigger condition)
plCmpVal Word device trigger condition, compared value Long
Value for pvbEnable
True Specified trigger word device is active.
False Specified trigger word device is inactive.
Value for psOpe

CmpOperator_EQUAL 0 Trigger condition is met when matching configured value.
CmpOperator_NEQUAL 1 Trigger condition is met when different from configured value.
CmpOperator_GREATER 2 Trigger condition is met when larger than configured value.
Trigger condition is met when equal to configured value or
larger.
CmpOperator_LESS 4 Trigger condition is met when smaller than configured value.
smaller.
● Explanation
Sets word device to be as PLC trigger condition. Active/inactive trigger condition flag, device index,
comparison operation and compared value can be set collectively.
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim pvbEnable As Boolean
Dim psOpe As Integer
Dim psSelIdx As Integer
Dim plCmpVal As Long
AxDBRTLoggingManager1.GetTrgParamWord(pvbEnable, psOpe, psSelIdx, plCmpVal)

End Sub

DBRTLoggingManager
 SetTrgParamWord Method
Sets trigger word device.

Communicating Yes
● Syntax
DBRTLoggingManager.GetTrgParamWord(vbEnable, sOpe, sSelIdx, lCmpVal)
vbEnable
Word device trigger condition, active/
inactive flag
Boolean
4
Word device trigger condition,
sOpe Integer
comparison operator
Device index
sSelIdx (Index in Devices of device as trigger Integer
condition)
Word device trigger condition, compared
lCmpVal Long
value
Value for vbEnable
True Specified trigger word device is active.
False Specified trigger word device is inactive.
Value for sOpe

CmpOperator_EQUAL 0 Trigger condition is met when matching configured value.
CmpOperator_NEQUAL 1 Trigger condition is met when different from configured value.
CmpOperator_GREATER 2 Trigger condition is met when larger than configured value.
larger.
CmpOperator_LESS 4 Trigger condition is met when smaller than configured value.
smaller.
● Explanation
Sets word device to be as PLC trigger condition. Active/inactive trigger condition flag, device index,
comparison operation and compared value can be set collectively.
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
AxDBRTLoggingManager1.SetTrgParamWord(True, _
DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBRTLCmpOperatorSet.CmpOperator_GREATER_EQ, 2, 500)
End Sub

DBRTLoggingManager
Events
 BeforeRead Event
Occurs before reading process is actually performed to the connected equipment when executing
ReadData method.
● Syntax
Sub DBRTLoggingManager_BeforeRead()
● Explanation
Occurs before reading process is actually performed to the connected equipment when executing
4 ReadData method.
● References
● Usage Example
Private Sub AxDBRTLoggingManager1_BeforeRead(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As _

System.EventArgs) Handles AxDBRTLoggingManager1.BeforeRead
MsgBox(" Start reading process")
End Sub

DBRTLoggingManager
 AfterRead Event
Occurs after actual reading process to the connected equipment is finished when executing ReadData
method.

● Syntax
Sub DBRTLoggingManager_AfterRead()
● Explanation
Occurs after actual reading process to the connected equipment is finished when executing ReadData
method.
● References
"ReadData"(4-151 page) 4
● Usage Example
Private Sub AxDBRTLoggingManager1_AfterRead(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As _

System.EventArgs) Handles AxDBRTLoggingManager1.AfterRead
MsgBox(" Reading process completed")
End Sub

DBRTLoggingDataCollection Object
Properties
 Count Property
Obtains the number of DBRTLoggingData included in collection.
Communication Value
Value setting
status acquisition
Communication
4 suspended
Yes No
● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBRTLoggingDataCollection.Count

value The number of DBRTLoggingData Long
● Explanation
Obtains the number of DBRTLoggingData included in collection.
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim lDataCount As Long
Dim lDevData As Long
lDataCount = AxDBRTLoggingManager1.LoggingDataCollection.Count
lDevData = AxDBRTLoggingManager1.LoggingDataCollection.Item(lDataCount).DeviceValues(1).Value
End Sub

 Item Property
Obtains DBRTLoggingData registered for specified index.
Communication Value
Value setting

status acquisition
Communication
Yes No
suspended
● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBRTLoggingDataCollection.Item

value Registered DBRTLoggingData DBRTLoggingData
● Explanation
Obtains DBRTLoggingData registered for specified index.
● Usage Example
See usage example of "Id"(4-162 page).

DBRTLoggingData Object
Properties
 Id Property
Obtains data ID.
Communication Value
Value setting
status acquisition
Communication
4 suspended
Yes No
● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBRTLoggingData.Id

value Data ID Long
● Explanation
For real time logging, data is collected by sampling cycle, and collected data is managed with data ID in
order. Data ID of DBRTLoggingData object can be obtained with ID property.
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim ltrgID As Long
Dim lDataID As Long
Dim dateTime As Object
Dim bPLCTrigger As Boolean
Dim lDeviceCount As Long
Dim err As Integer
ltrgID = AxDBRTLoggingManager1.TriggerID
If ltrgID > 100 Then
err = AxDBRTLoggingManager1.ReadData(ltrgID - 100, 200)
Else
err = AxDBRTLoggingManager1.ReadData(0, 200)
End If
lDataID = AxDBRTLoggingManager1.LoggingDataCollection.Item(1).Id
dateTime = AxDBRTLoggingManager1.LoggingDataCollection.Item(1).DateTime
bPLCTrigger = AxDBRTLoggingManager1.LoggingDataCollection.Item(1).PLCTrigger
lDeviceCount = AxDBRTLoggingManager1.LoggingDataCollection.Item(1).DeviceCount
lDevData = AxDBRTLoggingManager1.LoggingDataCollection.Item(1).DeviceValues(1).Value
End Sub

 DateTime Property
Obtains sampled date/time.
Communication Value
Value setting

status acquisition
Communication
Yes No
suspended
● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBRTLoggingData.DateTime

value Date/time Variant
● Explanation
Obtains sampled date/time.
● Usage Example
 PLCTrigger Property
Obtains whether PLC triggers occurred.
Communication Value
Value setting
status acquisition
Communication
Yes No
suspended
● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBRTLoggingData.PLCTrigger

value Status of PLC trigger Boolean
● Explanation
Obtains whether PLC triggers occurred.
● Usage Example

 DeviceCount Property
Obtains the number of devices (up to 128 devices).
Communication Value
Value setting
status acquisition
Communication
Yes No
suspended
● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBRTLoggingData.DeviceCount

value The number of devices Long
● Explanation
Obtains the number of devices (up to 128 devices).
● Usage Example

 DeviceValues Property
Obtains DBRTLoggingDataValue collection.
Communication Value
Value setting

status acquisition
Communication
Yes No
suspended
● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBRTLoggingData.DeviceValues

value DBRTLoggingDataValue collection DBRTLoggingDataValue
● Explanation
Obtains DBRTLoggingDataValue collection.
● Usage Example

DBRTLoggingDataValue Object
Properties
 DeviceType Property
Obtains device type.
Communication Value
Value setting
status acquisition
Communication
4 suspended
Yes No
● Syntax
Set DeviceType=DBRTLoggingDataValue.DeviceType

DeviceType Device type Long

dtBit 0 Device type is bit device.
dtWord 1 Device type is word device (16-bit).
dtDWord 2 Device type is word device (32-bit).
● Explanation
Obtains device type of the specified device.
● Usage Example

Button1.Click
Dim ldevicetype As Long
Dim ltrgID As Long
ltrgID = AxDBRTLoggingManager1.TriggerID
ldevicetype = _
AxDBRTLoggingManager1.LoggingDataCollection.Item(ltrgID).DeviceValues(1).DeviceType
lDevData = AxDBRTLoggingManager1.LoggingDataCollection.Item(1).DeviceValues(1).Value
End Sub

 Value Property
Obtains sampled device data.
Communication Value
Value setting

status acquisition
Communication
Yes No
suspended
● Syntax
value=DBRTLoggingDataValue.Value

value Device data Long
● Explanation
Obtains sampled device data.
● Usage Example
See usage example of "DeviceType"(4-166 page).

4-3 ActiveX Control
DBCommandButton
This section describes property/method/event of each ActiveX control.
DBCommandButton Object
This control creates switch, lamp switch, lamp and N-state lamp.
Switch has two types of state, “ON” and “OFF” lump has two types of state, “Light-on” and “Light-off.”
Lamp switch has four types of state, “Light-on by ON,” “Light-off by ON,” “Light-on by OFF,” “Light-off by
OFF.” N-state lamp has N types of state.
You can check the number of states (N) on the property page.
4  Properties
Obtain Set
ActiveX Control

value value
Status Obtains or sets status. Yes Yes 4-171
BackgroundColor Sets background color of control. No Yes 4-182
 Method
GetStatus Obtains status. 4-183
SetStatus Sets status. 4-183
GetStatusMax Obtains the number of status. 4-183
GetType Obtains button type. 4-183
GetMode Obtains button mode. 4-184
IsButtonPushed Obtains button pushed flag. 4-184
ResetButtonPushed Resets button pushed flag. 4-184
ShowPropDialog Displays sub-property dialog. 4-184
InvalidateCtrl Redraws control. 4-184
SetInitMode Sets mode when newly creating. 4-185
Point • BackgroundColor property can be changed directly from the property window, however,
you need to save and reload control in order to reflect on the actual control.

Click Occurs when clicking object. 4-186
DblClick Occurs when double-clicking object. 4-186
MouseDown Occurs when pressing mouse button on object. 4-186
MouseMove Occurs when mouse pointer moves on object. 4-186
MouseUp Occurs when pressed mouse button is released. 4-186

4-3 ActiveX Control
DBBarMeter
DBBarMeter Object
A control to create bar type meter.

Various bar type meters can be created by setting “Each range configuration,” “Setting on display,”
“Setting on scale” and so on in the property page.
Previously configured bar type meter can be used by selecting “Style.”
 Properties
Obtain Set
value value
InputValue
InputRangeLowerLimit
Obtains or sets value.
Obtains or sets lower limit of input range.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
4-172
4-173
4
ActiveX Control
InputRangeUpperLimit Obtains or sets upper limit of input range. Yes Yes 4-173
DisplayRangeLowerLimit Obtains or sets lower limit of display range. Yes Yes 4-175
DisplayRangeUpperLimit Obtains or sets upper limit of display range. Yes Yes 4-175
AlarmRangeLowerLimit Obtains or sets lower limit of alarm range. Yes Yes 4-176
AlarmRangeUpperLimit Obtains or sets upper limit of alarm range. Yes Yes 4-176
Obtains or sets status of showing/hiding
ShowOptimumValue Yes Yes 4-179
optimum value.
OptimumValue Obtains or sets optimum value. Yes Yes 4-177
ShowLowerAlarm Yes Yes 4-178
lower limit of alarm.
ShowUpperAlarm Yes Yes 4-178
upper limit of alarm.
ScaleMarkingColor Obtains or sets scale color. Yes Yes 4-180
ScaleMarkingLowerAlarmColor Obtains or sets line color of lower limit of alarm. Yes Yes 4-181
ScaleMarkingUpperAlarmColor Obtains or sets line color of upper limit of alarm. Yes Yes 4-181
BackgroundColor Sets background color of control image. No Yes 4-182
 Method
ShowPropDialog Displays sub-property dialog box. 4-184


4-3 ActiveX Control
DBFanMeter
DBFanMeter Object
A control to create circle meter and fan-shaped meter.

Circle meter can set start and end angles to represent lower and upper values of input range or display
range within 360 degree, fan-shaped meter can set them within 180 degree.
Like bar type meter, various circle and fan-shaped meters can be created by setting “Each range
configuration,” “Setting on display,” “Setting on scale” and so on in the property page.
Previously configured circle and fan-shaped meters can be used by selecting “Style.”
 Properties
Obtain Set Refer
4 Property name
InputValue
Description
Obtains or sets value.

value
Yes
value
Yes
ence
4-172
ActiveX Control
InputRangeLowerLimit Obtains or sets lower limit of input range. Yes Yes 4-173
InputRangeUpperLimit Obtains or sets upper limit of input range. Yes Yes 4-173
DisplayRangeLowerLimit Obtains or sets lower limit of display range. Yes Yes 4-175
DisplayRangeUpperLimit Obtains or sets upper limit of display range. Yes Yes 4-175
AlarmRangeLowerLimit Obtains or sets lower limit of alarm range. Yes Yes 4-176
AlarmRangeUpperLimit Obtains or sets upper limit of alarm range. Yes Yes 4-176
ShowOptimumValue Yes Yes 4-179
optimum value.
OptimumValue Obtains or sets optimum value. Yes Yes 4-177
ShowLowerAlarm Yes Yes 4-178
lower limit of alarm.
ShowUpperAlarm Yes Yes 4-178
upper limit of alarm.
ScaleMarkingColor Obtains or sets scale color. Yes Yes 4-180
ScaleMarkingLowerAlarmColor Obtains or sets line color of lower limit of alarm. Yes Yes 4-181
ScaleMarkingUpperAlarmColor Obtains or sets line color of upper limit of alarm. Yes Yes 4-181
BackgroundColor Sets background color of control image. No Yes 4-182
 Method
ShowPropDialog Displays sub-property dialog box. 4-184


4-3 ActiveX Control
DBCommandButton
Properties
 Status Property

Obtains or sets status of switch, lamp, lamp switch and N-state lamp.
● Syntax
When obtaining: value=DBComandButton.Status
When setting: DBCommandButton.Status=value

value Status Integer

4
ActiveX Control
Type Value Description
0: OFF
Switch 0 -1
1: ON
0: Light-off
Lamp 0 -1
1: Light-on
0:Light-off with OFF
1:Light-off with ON
Lamp switch 0 -3
2:Light-on with OFF
3:Light-on with ON
0 - (N-1)
Depends on type of N
N status lamp (* N depends on the selected N status
status lamp.
lamp)
● Explanation
Switch has two types of status, “ON” and “OFF”; lump also has two status types “Light-on” and “Light-
off.” Lamp switch has four types of status, “Light-on by ON,” “Light-off by ON,” “Light-on by OFF,” “Light-
off by OFF.” N status lamp has N types of status.
Check the number of status (N) on the property page.
● Usage Example
Private Sub AxDBCommandButton1_Enter(ByVal sender As System.Object, ByVal e As _

System.EventArgs) Handles AxDBCommandButton1.Enter
If AxDBCommandButton1.Status = 1 Then
AxDBCommandButton1.Status = 0
Else
AxDBCommandButton1.Status = 1
End If
End Sub

4-3 ActiveX Control
DBBarMeter
DBFanMeter
 InputValue Property
Obtains or sets data to be referred as value.
● Syntax
When obtaining: value=DBBarMeter.InputValue

When setting: DBBarMeter.InputValue=value
When obtaining: value=DBFanMeter.InputValue
When setting: DBFanMeter.InputValue=value

value Input value Double
4 ● Explanation
Obtains or sets input value to display.
ActiveX Control
● Usage Example
Private Sub Timer1_Tick(ByVal sender As System.Object, ByVal e As System.EventArgs) Handles _

Timer1.Tick
AxDBFanMeter1.InputValue =AxDBCommManager1.ReadDevice _
End Sub

4-3 ActiveX Control
DBBarMeter
DBFanMeter
 InputRangeLowerLimit
Property
 InputRangeUpperLimit
Can obtain or sets the lower limit of input range with InputRangeLowerLimit and the upper limit of input

range with InputRangeUpperLimit.
● Syntax
When obtaining: LowerLimit = DBBarMeter.InputRangeLowerLimit
When setting: DBBarMeter.InputRangeLowerLimit = LowerLimit
When obtaining: UpperLimit = DBBarMeter.InputRangeUpperLimit
When setting: DBBarMeter.InputRangeUpperLimit = UpperLimit
When obtaining: LowerLimit = DBFanMeter.InputRangeLowerLimit
When setting: DBFanMeter.InputRangeLowerLimit = LowerLimit 4
When obtaining: UpperLimit = DBFanMeter.InputRangeUpperLimit
ActiveX Control
When setting: DBFanMeter.InputRangeUpperLimit = UpperLimit

LowerLimit Lower limit of input range Double
UpperLimit Upper limit of input range Double
● Explanation
Can obtain or set the lower limit of input range with InputRangeLowerLimit and the upper limit of input
range with InputRangeUpperLimit.
Set value of InputRangeLowerLimit lower than that of InputRangeUpperLimit.
● References
"InputValue"(4-172 page)
"DisplayRangeLowerLimit"(4-175 page)
"DisplayRangeUpperLimit"(4-175 page)
● Usage Example

MyBase.Load
AxDBFanMeter1.ScaleMarkingColor = Color.DarkOrange
AxDBFanMeter1.InputRangeLowerLimit = 0
AxDBFanMeter1.InputRangeUpperLimit = 1000
AxDBFanMeter1.DisplayRangeLowerLimit = 0
AxDBFanMeter1.DisplayRangeUpperLimit = 100
AxDBFanMeter1.ShowLowerAlarm = True
AxDBFanMeter1.ScaleMarkingLowerAlarmColor = Color.BlueViolet
AxDBFanMeter1.AlarmRangeLowerLimit = 10
AxDBFanMeter1.ShowUpperAlarm = True
AxDBFanMeter1.ScaleMarkingUpperAlarmColor = Color.Red
AxDBFanMeter1.AlarmRangeUpperLimit = 90
AxDBFanMeter1.ShowOptimumValue = True
AxDBFanMeter1.OptimumValue = 50
End Sub

4-3 ActiveX Control
DBBarMeter
DBFanMeter
Reference When input value is out of input range (higher than the upper limit or lower than the lower
limit), the upper or lower limit of input range is displayed and value out of the range is
never displayed.
Example) If the lower limit of input range is 1000, and the upper limit is 10000:
Input value is 500 => Displayed value is 1000
Input value is 20000 => Displayed value is 10000
When display range and input range are different, input value is displayed by converting
into display range.
Example) When the lower limit of input range is 0 and the upper limit is 1000, the
4 lower limit of display range is 0 and the upper limit is 300:
Input value
ActiveX Control
0 500 1000
Input range
Conversion
0 300
Display range
Converted value
150

4-3 ActiveX Control
DBBarMeter
DBFanMeter
 DisplayRangeLowerLimit
Property
 DisplayRangeUpperLimit
Can obtain or set the lower limit of display range with DisplayRangeLowerLimit and the upper limit with

DisplayRangeUpperLimit.
● Syntax
When obtaining: LowerLimit = DBBarMeter.DisplayRangeLowerLimit
When setting: DBBarMeter.DisplayRangeLowerLimit = LowerLimit
When obtaining: UpperLimit = DBBarMeter.DisplayRangeUpperLimit
When setting: DBBarMeter.DisplayRangeUpperLimit = UpperLimit
When obtaining: LowerLimit = DBFanMeter.DisplayRangeLowerLimit
When setting: DBFanMeter.DisplayRangeLowerLimit = LowerLimit 4
When obtaining: UpperLimit = DBFanMeter.DisplayRangeUpperLimit
ActiveX Control
When setting: DBFanMeter.DisplayRangeUpperLimit = UpperLimit

LowerLimit Lower limit of display range Double
UpperLimit Upper limit of display range Double
● Explanation
Can obtain or set the lower limit of display range with DisplayRangeLowerLimit and the upper limit of
display range with DisplayRangeUpperLimit.
Set value of DisplayRangeLowerLimit lower than that of DisplayRangeUpperLimit.
● References
"InputValue"(4-172 page)
"DisplayRangeLowerLimit"(4-175 page)
"DisplayRangeUpperLimit"(4-175 page)
● Usage Example
See usage example of "InputRangeLowerLimit" and "InputRangeUpperLimit"(4-173 page).

4-3 ActiveX Control
DBBarMeter
DBFanMeter
 AlarmRangeLowerLimit
Property
 AlarmRangeUpperLimit
Can obtain or set the lower limit of alarm range with AlarmRangeLowerLimit and the upper limit with
AlarmRangeUpperLimit.
● Syntax
When obtaining: LowerLimit = DBBarMeter.AlarmRangeLowerLimit
When setting: DBBarMeter.AlarmRangeLowerLimit = LowerLimit
When obtaining: UpperLimit = DBBarMeter.AlarmRangeUpperLimit
When setting: DBBarMeter.AlarmRangeUpperLimit = UpperLimit
4 When obtaining: LowerLimit = DBFanMeter.AlarmRangeLowerLimit

When setting: DBFanMeter.AlarmRangeLowerLimit = LowerLimit
When obtaining: UpperLimit = DBFanMeter.AlarmRangeUpperLimit
ActiveX Control
When setting: DBFanMeter.AlarmRangeUpperLimit = UpperLimit

LowerLimit Lower limit of alarm range Double
UpperLimit Upper limit of alarm range Double
● Explanation
Can obtain or set the lower limit of alarm range with AlarmRangeLowerLimit and the upper limit of
alarm range with AlarmRangeUpperLimit.
Set value of AlarmRangeLowerLimit lower than that of AlarmRangeUpperLimit.
● References
"ShowLowerAlarm"(4-178 page)
"ShowUpperAlarm"(4-178 page)
"ScaleMarkingLowerAlarmColor"(4-181 page)
"ScaleMarkingUpperAlarmColor"(4-181 page)
● Usage Example

4-3 ActiveX Control
DBBarMeter
DBFanMeter
 OptimumValue Property
Obtains or sets optimum value.
● Syntax

When obtaining: value = DBFanMeter.OptimumValue
When setting: DBFanMeter.OptimumValue = value
When obtaining: value = DBFanMeter.OptimumValue
When setting: DBFanMeter.OptimumValue = value

value Optimum value Double
● Explanation 4
Obtains or sets optimum value.
ActiveX Control
● References
"ShowOptimumValue"(4-179 page)
● Usage Example

4-3 ActiveX Control
DBBarMeter
DBFanMeter
 ShowLowerAlarm
Property
 ShowUpperAlarm
Obtains or sets status of showing/hiding the lower limit of alarm with ShowLowerAlarm and the upper
limit with ShowUpperAlarm.
● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBBarMeter.ShowLowerAlarm
When setting: DBBarMeter.ShowLowerAlarm = value
When obtaining: value = DBBarMeter.ShowUpperAlarm
When setting: DBBarMeter.ShowUpperAlarm = value
4 When obtaining: value = DBFanMeter.ShowLowerAlarm

When setting: DBFanMeter.ShowLowerAlarm = value
When obtaining: value = DBFanMeter.ShowUpperAlarm
ActiveX Control
When setting: DBFanMeter.ShowUpperAlarm = value

value Status of showing/hiding Boolean
True Displays alarm the upper/lower limit.
False Does not display alarm the upper/lower limit.
● Explanation
Obtains or sets status of showing/hiding the lower limit of alarm with ShowLowerAlarm and the upper
limit with ShowUpperAlarm.
● References
"AlarmRangeLowerLimit"(4-176 page)
"AlarmRangeUpperLimit"(4-176 page)
"ScaleMarkingLowerAlarmColor"(4-181 page)
"ScaleMarkingUpperAlarmColor"(4-181 page)
● Usage Example

4-3 ActiveX Control
DBBarMeter
DBFanMeter
 ShowOptimumValue Property
Obtains or sets status of showing/hiding optimum value.
● Syntax

When obtaining: value = DBFanMeter.ShowOptimumValue
When setting: DBFanMeter.ShowOptimumValue = value
When obtaining: value = DBFanMeter.ShowOptimumValue
When setting: DBFanMeter.ShowOptimumValue = value

value Status of showing/hiding optimum value Boolean
Value for ‘value’ 4

ActiveX Control
True Displays optimum value.
False Does not display optimum value.
● Explanation
Obtains or sets status of showing/hiding optimum value.
● References
"OptimumValue"(4-177 page)
● Usage Example

4-3 ActiveX Control
DBBarMeter
DBFanMeter
 ScaleMarkingColor Property
Obtains or sets scale color.

● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBFanMeter.ScaleMarkingColor
When setting: DBFanMeter.ScaleMarkingColor = value

value Scale color System.Drawing.Color
● Explanation
4 Obtains or sets scale color.
● References
ActiveX Control
"InputRangeLowerLimit"(4-173 page)
"InputRangeUpperLimit"(4-173 page)
● Usage Example

4-3 ActiveX Control
DBBarMeter
DBFanMeter
 ScaleMarkingLowerAlarmColor
Property
 ScaleMarkingUpperAlarmColor
Can obtain or set line color of lower limit of alarm with ScaleMarkingLowerAlarmColor and that of upper

limit of alarm with ScaleMarkingUpperAlarmColor.
● Syntax
When obtaining: value = DBFanMeter.ScaleMarkingLowerAlarmColor
When setting: DBFanMeter.ScaleMarkingLowerAlarmColor = value
When obtaining: value = DBFanMeter.ScaleMarkingUpperAlarmColor
When setting: DBFanMeter.ScaleMarkingUpperAlarmColor = value
Value Description
Line color of alarm the lower limit or the
Type
4
value System.Drawing.Color
upper limit
ActiveX Control
● Explanation
Can obtain or set line color of lower limit of alarm with ScaleMarkingLowerAlarmColor and that of upper
limit of alarm with ScaleMarkingUpperAlarmColor.
● References
"AlarmRangeLowerLimit"(4-176 page)
"AlarmRangeUpperLimit"(4-176 page)
"ShowLowerAlarm"(4-178 page)
"ShowUpperAlarm"(4-178 page)
● Usage Example

4-3 ActiveX Control
DBCommandButton
DBBarMeter
DBFanMeter
 BackgroundColor Property
Sets background color of control image.

● Syntax
DBFanMeter.BackgroundColor = value

value Background color System.Drawing.Color
● Explanation
Sets background color of control image.
4 BackgroundColor property can be changed directly from the property window, however, you need to
save and reload control in order to reflect on the actual control.
ActiveX Control
● Usage Example
DBCommandButton.BackgroundColor = System.Drawing.Color.AliceBlue
DBCommandButton.BackgroundColor = System.Drawing.Color.FromArgb(&HFFFF00)
DBCommandButton.BackgroundColor = System.Drawing.SystemColors.Control
DBFanMeter.BackgroundColor = System.Drawing.Color.AliceBlue
DBFanMeter.BackgroundColor = System.Drawing.Color.FromArgb(&HFFFF00)
DBFanMeter.BackgroundColor = System.Drawing.SystemColors.Control
DBBarMeter.BackgroundColor = System.Drawing.Color.AliceBlue
DBBarMeter.BackgroundColor = System.Drawing.Color.FromArgb(&HFFFF00)
DBBarMeter.BackgroundColor = System.Drawing.SystemColors.Control

4-3 ActiveX Control
DBCommandButtonr
Methods
 GetStatus Method

Obtains object status.
● Syntax
value=DBCommandButton.GetStatus

 SetStatus Method 4
Sets object status.
ActiveX Control
● Syntax
DBCommandButton.SetStatus=value

 GetStatusMax Method
Obtains the number of object status.

Switch and lamp include two types of status, lamp switch has four types of them, and N status lamp
depends on the used style.
● Syntax
value=DBCommandButton.GetStatusMax

value The number of status Integer
 GetType Method
Obtains button type.
● Syntax
value=DBCommandButton.GetType

value Type value Integer
Value Description
0 Switch
1 Lamp switch
2 Lamp
3 N status lamp

4-3 ActiveX Control
DBCommandButton
 GetMode Method
Obtains button mode.
● Syntax
value=DBCommandButton.GetMode

value Mode value Integer
Value Description
4 0 Set
1 Reset
ActiveX Control
2 Bit invert
3 Momentary
 IsButtonPushed Method
Obtains button pushed flag.
● Syntax
value=DBCommandButton.IsButtonPushed

value Button pushed flag Boolean
True Button was pushed.
False Button is not pushed.
 ResetButtonPushed Method
Resets button pushed flag.
● Syntax
DBCommandButton.ResetButtonPushed
 ShowPropDialog Method
Displays sub-property dialog box.
● Syntax
DBCommandButton.ShowPropDialog
 InvalidateCtrl Method
Redraws control. Often used after control property is changed.
● Syntax
DBCommandButton.InvalidateCtrl

4-3 ActiveX Control
DBCommandButton
 SetInitMode Method
Sets mode for new creation.
● Syntax

DBCommandButton.SetInitMode(value)

value Mode value Integer
Value Description
0 Switch 4
1 Lamp switch
ActiveX Control
2 Lamp
3 N status lamp

4-3 ActiveX Control
DBCommandButton
DBBarMeter
DBFanMeter
Events
 Click Event
Occurs when clicking object placed on the form.
● Syntax
Sub DBCommandButton_ClickEvent()
Sub DBBarMeter_ClickEvent()
Sub DBFanMeter_ClickEvent()
 DblClick Event
4 Occurs when double-clicking object placed on the form.
ActiveX Control
● Syntax
Sub DBCommandButton_DblClick()
Sub DBBarMeter_DblClick()
Sub DBFanMeter_DblClick()
 MouseDown Event
Occurs when pressing mouse button on the object placed on the form.
● Syntax
Sub DBCommandButton_MouseDownEvent()
Sub DBBarMeter_MouseDownEvent()
Sub DBFanMeter1_MouseDownEvent()
 MouseMove Event
Occurs when moving mouse pointer on the object placed on the form.
● Syntax
Sub DBCommandButton_MouseMoveEvent()
Sub DBBarMeter_MouseMoveEvent()
Sub DBFanMeter_MouseMoveEvent()
 MouseUp Event
Occurs when pressed mouse button is released on the object placed on the form.
● Syntax
Sub DBCommandButton_MouseUpEvent()
Sub DBBarMeter_MouseUpEvent()
Sub DBFanMeter_MouseUpEvent()
● Explanation
Occurs when pressed mouse button is released on the object placed on the form.

4-4 Data Conversion Function
DBValueConverterEx
KV COM+ Library provides objects to interconvert device value and string.
DBValueConverterEx Object

An object to provide function to convert from value data to string data, or from string data to value data.
Methods of DBValueConverterEx object performs conversion.
 Methods
ValueToUnsignedText
Converts LONG variable to decimal 16-bit format string
without sign.
4-189 4
Converts LONG variable to decimal 16-bit format string with
Data Conversion Function

ValueToSignedText 4-189
sign.
ValueToHexText Converts LONG variable to hexadecimal 16-bit format string. 4-189
ValueToBcdText Converts LONG variable to 1BCD format string. 4-189
ValueToBinText Converts LONG variable to binary format string 4-189
Converts LONG variable divided into the higher and lower to
WValueToUnsignedText 4-190
decimal 32-bit format string without sign.
WValueToSignedText 4-190
decimal 32-bit format string with sign.
WValueToHexText 4-190
hexadecimal 32-bit format string.
WValueToBcdText 4-190
32-bit BCD format string.
WValueToBinText 4-190
binary 32-bit format string.
Converts LONG variables divided into the higher and lower
WValueToFloatText 4-191
to single precision floating point real number format string.
Converts string to represent decimal 16-bit without sign to
UnsignedTextToValue 4-192
LONG variable.
Converts string to represent decimal 16-bit with sign to
SignedTextToValue 4-192
LONG variable.
Converts string to represent hexadecimal 16-bit to LONG
HexTextToValue 4-192
variable.
BcdTextToValue Converts string to represent 16-bit BCD to LONG variable. 4-192
BinTextToValue Converts string to represent binary 16-bit to LONG variable. 4-192
Converts string to represent decimal 32-bit without sign to
UnsignedTextToWValue number and to two LONG variables of the higher and lower 4-194
digits.
Converts string to represent decimal 32-bit with sign to
SignedTextToWValue number and to two LONG variables of the higher and lower 4-194
digits.
Converts string to represent hexadecimal 32-bit to number
HexTextToWValue 4-194
and to two LONG variables of the higher and lower digits.
Converts string to represent 32-bit BCD to number and to
BcdTextToWValue 4-194
two LONG variables of the higher and lower digits.
Converts string to represent binary 32-bit to number and to
BinTextToWValue 4-194
two LONG variables of the higher and lower digits.

DBValueConverterEx

Converts string to represent single precision floating point
FloatTextToWValue real number to number and to two LONG variables of the 4-196
higher and lower digits.
Combines LONG variables divided into the higher and lower

WValueToSigned 4-197
digits and converts to one LONG variable.
Converts LONG variables divided into the higher and lower
WValueToFloat 4-197
to single precision floating point real number.
Converts LONG variable into two LONG variables divided
SignedToWValue 4-198
into the higher and lower.
Converts single precision floating point real number into two
FloatToWValue 4-198
4
LONG variables divided into the higher and lower.
Point • Not available for VBScript.

DBValueConverterEx
Methods
 ValueToUnsignedText

 ValueToSignedText
 ValueToHexText Method
 ValueToBcdText
 ValueToBinText
Converts Long variable to 16-bit string data format. 4
ValueToUnsignedText: Converts to decimal 16-bit format string without sign.

ValueToSignedText: Converts to decimal 16-bit format string with sign.
ValueToHexText: Converts to hexadecimal 16-bit format string.
ValueToBcdText: Converts to 16-bit BCD format string.
ValueToBinText: Converts to binary 16-bit format string.
● Syntax
ValueToUnsignedText(value, strText)
ValueToSignedText(value, strText)
ValueToHexText(value, strText)
ValueToBcdText(value, strText)
ValueToBinText(value, strText)

value Value to be converted Long
strText Converted string String
● Explanation
Converts Long variable to 16-bit string data format. Runtime error occurs when there is a value which
cannot be converted.
Only low 16-bit of converted value is used.
● Usage Example
Dim CV As DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBValueConverterEx
Dim value As Integer
Dim valueH As Integer
Dim unsignedText As String
Dim signedText As String
Dim hexText As String
Dim bcdText As String
Dim binText As String
CV = New DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBValueConverterEx
value = 1234
valueH = &H1234
CV.ValueToUnsignedText(value, unsignedText)
CV.ValueToSignedText(value, signedText)
CV.ValueToHexText(valueH,hexText)
CV.ValueToBcdText(valueH, bcdText)
CV.ValueToBinText(value, binText)
MsgBox(unsignedText + vbLf + signedText + vbLf + hexText + vbLf + bcdText + vbLf + binText)

DBValueConverterEx
 WValueToUnsignedText
 WValueToSignedText
 WValueToHexText Method
 WValueToBcdText
 WValueToBinText
Converts two Long variables divided into the higher and lower digits to 32-bit string data format.
WValueToUnsignedText: Converts to decimal 32-bit format string without sign.
4 WValueToSignedText:
WValueToHexText:
Converts to decimal 32-bit format string with sign.
Converts to hexadecimal 32-bit format string.
WValueToBcdText: Converts to 32-bit BCD format string.
WValueToBinText: Converts to binary 32-bit format string.
● Syntax
WValueToUnsignedText(valueL,valueH,strText)
WValueToSignedText(valueL,valueH, strText)
WValueToHexText(valueL,valueH, strText)
WValueToBcdText(valueL,valueH, strText)
WValueToBinText(valueL,valueH, strText)

valueL The low 16 bit value to be converted Long
valueH The high 16 bit value to be converted Long
strText Converted strings String
● Explanation
Converts two Long variables divided into the high and low to 32-bit string data format. Runtime error
occurs when there is a value which cannot be converted.
Only low 16-bit of converted values (higher and lower) is used.
● Usage Example
Dim valueL As Long
Dim valueH As Long
valueL = &H1234
valueH = &H5678
CV.WValueToUnsignedText(valueL, valueH, unsignedText)
CV.WValueToSignedText(valueL, valueH, signedText)
CV.WValueToHexText(valueL, valueH, hexText)
CV.WValueToBcdText(valueL, valueH, bcdText)
CV.WValueToBinText(valueL, valueH, binText)
MsgBox(unsignedText + vbLf + signedText + vbLf + hexText + vbLf + bcdText + vbLf + binText)

DBValueConverterEx
 WValueToFloatText Method
Converts two LONG variables divided into the high and low to string data format of single precision
floating point.

● Syntax
WValueToFloatText(valueL,valueH,strText)

valueL The low 16 bit value to be converted Long
valueH The high 16 bit value to be converted Long
strText Converted strings String
● Explanation 4
Converts two LONG variables divided into the high and low to string data format of single precision

floating point. Conversion cannot be performed if data is not single precision floating point. Runtime
error occurs when there is a value which cannot be converted.
Only low 16-bit of converted values (higher and lower) is used.
● Usage Example
Dim valueL As Long
Dim valueH As Long
Dim floatText As String
valueL = &HE56
valueH = &H4049
CV.WValueToFloatText(valueL, valueH, floatText)
MsgBox(floatText)
'”3.1415” is stored in floatTesx.

DBValueConverterEx
 UnsignedTextToValue
 SignedTextToValue
 HexTextToValue Method
 BcdTextToValue
 BinTextToValue
Converts string data to Long variable.
UnsignedTextToValue : Converts string to represent decimal without sign.
4 SignedTextToValue :
HexTextToValue:
Converts string to represent decimal with sign.
Converts string to represent hexadecimal.
BcdTextToValue : Converts string to represent BCD data.
BinTextToValue: Converts string to represent binary data.
● Syntax
UnsignedTextToValue(strText, value )
SignedTextToValue(strText, value )
HexTextToValue(strText, value )
BcdTextToValue(strText, value )
BinTextToValue(strText, value )

strText String to be converted String
value Converted string Long
● Explanation
Converts string data to specified data format and store in Long variable.
Runtime error occurs when there is a value which cannot be converted and if converted digit exceeds
16bit.

DBValueConverterEx
● Usage Example

Dim unsignedValue As Long
Dim signedValue As Long
Dim hexValue As String
Dim bcdValue As String
Dim binValue As String
unsignedText = "12345"
4
signedText = "-12345"

hexText = "ABCD"
bcdText = "1234"
binText = "1010101010"
CV.UnsignedTextToValue(unsignedText, unsignedValue)
CV.SignedTextToValue(signedText, signedValue)
CV.HexTextToValue(hexText, hexValue)
CV.BcdTextToValue(bcdText, bcdValue)
CV.BinTextToValue(binText, binValue)

DBValueConverterEx
 UnsignedTextToWValue
 SignedTextToWValue
 HexTextToWValue Method
 BcdTextToWValue
 BinTextToWValue
Converts string data to two Long variables divided into the higher and lower digits.
UnsignedTextToWValue : Converts string to represent decimal without sign.
4 SignedTextToWValue :
HexTextToWValue:
Converts string to represent decimal with sign.
Converts string to represent hexadecimal.
BcdTextToWValue : Converts string to represent BCD.
BinTextToWValue: Converts string to represent binary.
● Syntax
UnsignedTextToWValue(strText, valueL ,valueH )
SignedTextToWValue(strText, valueL ,valueH )
HexTextToWValue(strText, valueL ,valueH )
BcdTextToWValue(strText, valueL ,valueH )
BinTextToWValue(strText, valueL ,valueH )

valueL The low 16 bit of converted value Long
valueH The high 16 bit of converted value Long
● Explanation
Converts string data to specified data format and store in two Long variables of the higher and lower
digits.
Runtime error occurs when there is a value which cannot be converted and if converted digits exceeds
32bit.

DBValueConverterEx
● Usage Example

Dim unsignedValueL As Long
Dim unsignedValueH As Long
Dim signedValueL As Long
Dim signedValueH As Long
Dim hexValueL As String
Dim hexValueH As String
Dim bcdValueL As String
Dim bcdValueH As String
4
Dim binValueL As String

Dim binValueH As String
unsignedText = "12345678"
signedText = "-12345678"
hexText = "ABCDEF"
bcdText = "12345678"
binText = "1010101010101011010101"
CV.UnsignedTextToWValue(unsignedText, unsignedValueL, unsignedValueH)
CV.SignedTextToWValue(signedText, signedValueL, signedValueH)
CV.HexTextToWValue(hexText, hexValueL, hexValueH)
CV.BcdTextToWValue(bcdText, bcdValueL, bcdValueH)
CV.BinTextToWValue(binText, binValueL, binValueH)

DBValueConverterEx
 FloatTextToWValue Method
Converts string data of single precision floating point to store into two LONG variables of the higher and
lower digits.
● Syntax
FloatTextToWValue(strText, valueL ,valueH )

4 ● Explanation
Converts string data of single precision floating point to store into two LONG variables of the higher and
lower digits.
Runtime error occurs when there is a value which cannot be converted.
● Usage Example
Dim floatText As String
Dim floatValueL As Long
Dim floatValueH As Long
floatText = "+3.1415"
CV.FloatTextToWValue(floatText, floatValueL, floatValueH)

DBValueConverterEx
 WValueToSigned
Method
 WValueToFloat
Combines LONG variables divided into the high and low digits and converts to one variable.

WValueToSigned: Converts to LONG variable.
WValueToFloat: Converts to single precision floating point real number.
● Syntax
WValueToSigned (valueL, valueH, value)
WValueToFloat (valueL, valueH, value)

valueL
valueL
The low 16 bit of converted value
The high 16 bit of converted value
Long
Long
4
WValueToSigned: Long

value Storage for converted value (32-bit)
WValueToFloat: Single
● Explanation
Combines LONG variables divided into the high and low digits and converts to one 32-bit variable.
Runtime error occurs when there is a value which cannot be converted.
Only the low 16-bit of valueL or valueH is used.
● Usage Example
Dim valueL As Long
Dim valueH As Long
Dim valueSined As Long
Dim valueFloat As Single
CV = New DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBValueConverterEx()
valueL = &HE979
valueH = &HC2F6
CV.WValueToSigned(valueL, valueH, valueSined)
CV.WValueToFloat(valueL, valueH, valueFloat)

DBValueConverterEx
 SignedToWValue
Method
 FloatToWValue
Converts LONG variable or single precision floating point real number into two LONG variables divided
into the high and low.

SignedToWValue: Converts LONG variable to the divided two LONG variables.
FloatToWValue: Converts single precision floating point real number to the divided two LONG
variables.
● Syntax
SignedToWValue (value, valueL, valueH)
FloatToWValue (value, valueL, valueH)

WValueToSigned: Long
value Value to be converted
WValueToFloat: Single
● Explanation
Converts LONG variable or single precision floating point real number into two LONG variables divided
into the higher and lower. Runtime error occurs when there is a value which cannot be converted.
● Usage Example
Dim valueSigned As Long
Dim valueFloat As Single
Dim valueLSigned As Long
Dim valueHSigned As Long
Dim valueLFloat As Long
Dim valueHFloat As Long
CV = New DATABUILDERAXLibLB.DBValueConverterEx()
valueSigned = -1000000
valueFloat = +123.456
CV.SignedToWValue(valueSigned, valueLSigned, valueHSigned)
CV.FloatToWValue(valueFloat, valueLFloat, valueHFloat)

5
About DLL Function

About DLL Function 5
This chapter introduces the installation of DLL and DLL functions.
5-1 Installation of DLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2

5-2 DLL Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3

5-1 Installation of DLL
How to Set the Path
Set the path to the folder on which KV COM+ Library is installed before use.
Set a new function name and the directory which has the files in the environment functions of the
advanced settings in "control panel" of WINDOWS.
About DLL Function
Link Setting
Use DataBuilderVC.lib to set link. Explicit link is not supported.

Select "Project" -> "Settings" to display "Project settings" window.
Click "Link" tab and add "DataBuidlerVC.lib" to "Object/Library module".
5
Include File
Installation of DLL
Include the following header files in the required source files.
#include "DataBuilder.h"
#include "DBPlcDef.h"
#include "ACPathManager2.h"

5-2 DLL Function
All of functions concerning to communication perform blocking (synchronous processing).
Character strings handled in DLL are unicode/shift JIS.
1 Constant, Type and Structure Definition
 DBHCONNECT
About DLL Function

Connection handle
● Definition
typedef void* DBHCONNECT;
● Explanation
Type of connection handles 5
 DBERROR
DLL Function
Error code
● Definition
typedef LONG DBERROR;
● Explanation
Type of error codes
 DBMode
Operation mode/state
● Definition
typedef enum { //Operation mode

DB_MODE_INVALID = 0,
DB_MODE_KV700_RUN, //RUN mode
DB_MODE_KV700_PROG, //PROG mode
DB_MODE_VT2_CF_UNLOCK, //Memory card unlocked
DB_MODE_VT2_CF_LOCK, //Memory card locked
} DBMode;
● Explanation
Represents the operation mode/state in KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 and VT3/DT.

5-2 DLL Function
 DBTime
Time
● Definition
typedef struct { //Time

WORD wYear; //Year
WORD wMonth; //Month
About DLL Function
WORD wDay; //Day

WORD wHour; //Hour
WORD wMinute; //Minute
WORD wSecond; //Second
} DBTime;
● Explanation
Time specification structure
5
 DBDevInfo
DLL Function
Device information
● Definition
#define DB_BITDEV_RW_MAX 16 // Upper limit of read/write number (Bit device)

#define DB_WORDDEV_RW_MAX 32 // Upper limit of read/write number (Word device)
#define DB_LONG_RW_MAX 120 // Upper limit of read/write number (One time continuous word
device reading)
#define DB_DEV_LONG_RW_MAX 8192 // Upper limit of read/write number (Whole continuous word
device reading)
#define DB_RANDOM_RW_MAX (DB_BITDEV_RW_MAX + DB_WORDDEV_RW_MAX)
// Upper limit of random read/write number
#define DB_STRRW_BYTE_MAX 256 // Upper limit of bytes for read/write number of character strings
typedef struct { // Device information
WORD wKind; // Device type
DWORD dwNo; // Device No.
LONG lValue; // Value
WORD wRTLDataSize; // Data length
WORD wRTLDataType; // Data type
WORD wRTLIndicationForm; // Display format
DWORD wRTLManageIndex; // Management index No.
WCHAR szNo[DB_DEVITM_MAX]; // Item path
} DBDevInfo;
● Explanation
Structure which represents the device information of KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700

5-2 DLL Function
 DBDevInfoEx
Device information (expansion)
● Definition
typedef struct { //Device information

WORD wKind; //Device type
CHAR szNo[DB_DEVNO_MAX]; //Device No.
About DLL Function

LONG lValue; //Value
WORD wRTLDataSize; //Data length
WORD wRTLDataType; //Data type
WORD wRTLIndicationForm; //Display format
DWORD wRTLManageIndex; //Management index No.
} DBDevInfoEx;
● Explanation
Structure which represents the device information of KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700
The format of device Nos. is as follows.
5
DLL Function
:= Device No. ""-" Bit No. in the device"
For example, "01000" represents specifying a device No. 01000.
"01000-12" represents specifying a bit 12 in a device No. 01000.
 DBPlcDevice
Device type definition
● Definition
typedef enum DBPlcDevice {

...
} DBPlcDevice;
● Explanation
Defines the device types of each model.
See "Device List" (A-4) for a list of devices you can set.
 DB_COMMENT_MAX
Maximum length of a device comment
● Definition
#define DB_COMMENT_MAX (32 + 1) // Maximum length of a device comment
● Explanation
Maximum length of a device comment

5-2 DLL Function
 DBKvAlarmLog
KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 one alarm log
● Definition
#define DBKV_ALARM_LOG_MAX 64 //Maximum number of alarm logs

typedef struct { //KV700/1000 one alarm
WORD wNo; //Alarm relay No. (CRXXXX)
About DLL Function
BOOL bUpEdge; //Up (TRUE), Down (FALSE)

DBTime Time; //Time
} DBKvAlarmLog;
● Explanation
KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 one alarm log
 DBMachineType
5 Model information
DLL Function
● Definition
#define DB_NAMEMAX (38 + 1) //Maximum length of the unit model name

#define DB_MAKERMAX (44 + 1) //Maximum length of the PLC manufacture name
#define DB_PLCNAMEMAX (64 + 1) //Maximum length of the PLC model name
typedef struct { //Model information
CHAR szName[DB_NAMEMAX]; //Unit model name
CHAR szPLCMaker[DB_MAKERMAX]; //PLC manufacture name
CHAR szPLCName[DB_PLCNAMEMAX]; //PLC model name
} DBMachineType;
● Explanation
Retains the model information of KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700.

5-2 DLL Function
 Connection destination
Connection destination information
● Definition
typedef enum { //Communication route

DBCOMTYPE_RS232C = 1, //RS232C
DBCOMTYPE_USB = 2, //USB
DBCOMTYPE_TCP = 4, //TCP
About DLL Function

DBCOMTYPE_BLUETOOTH = 5 //BLUETOOTH
} DBComType;
#define DB_ADDR_MAX 250 + 1 //Maximum length of the address
typedef struct { //TCP communication parameter
CHAR szAddr[DB_ADDR_MAX]; //Address
WORD wPortNo; //Port No.
} DBComParamTCPA;
typedef struct { //TCP communication parameter
5
WCHAR szAddr[DB_ADDR_MAX]; //Address
WORD wPortNo; //Port No.
} DBComParamTCPW;
#define DB_COMPORT_MAX 16 //Maximum number of COM ports
DLL Function
typedef struct { //RS232C communication parameter
BYTE byComNo; //COM Port No.
DBComBaud BaudRate; //Communication speed
SHORT nStation; //Station No. (-1: No station No.)
} DBComParamRS232C;
#define DB_BLUETOOTH_DEVNAME_LEN 31 //Maximum number of characters in the
Bluetooth distinguish name
#define DB_BLUETOOTH_BD_LEN 18 //Number of characters in the Bluetooth
BD address
(xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx)
#define DB_BLUETOOTH_PASSKEY_LEN 17 //Maximum number of characters in the
Bluetooth pass key
typedef struct { //BLUETOOTH parameter
int iComPort; //Virtual COM port setting value (1-100)
int iStackType; //Protocol stack type
BOOL flgManual; //COM automatic/manual
CHAR szDeviceName[DB_BLUETOOTH_DEVNAME_LEN]; //Distinguish name
CHAR szBDAddress[DB_BLUETOOTH_BD_LEN]; //BD address(display value as it is)
CHAR szPassKey[DB_BLUETOOTH_PASSKEY_LEN]; //Passkey
} DBComParamBLUETOOTHA;
typedef struct { //BLUETOOTH parameter
int iComPort; //Virtual COM port setting value (1-100)
int iStackType; //Protocol stack type
BOOL flgManual; //COM automatic/manual
WCHAR szDeviceName[DB_BLUETOOTH_DEVNAME_LEN]; //Distinguish name
WCHAR szBDAddress[DB_BLUETOOTH_BD_LEN]; //BD address(display value as it is)
WCHAR szPassKey[DB_BLUETOOTH_PASSKEY_LEN]; //Passkey
} DBComParamBLUETOOTHW;
typedef struct { //Connection configuration information
DBComType Type; //Communication route
DBComParamTCPA ParamTCP; //TCP communication parameter
DBComParamRS232C ParamRS232C; //RS232C communication parameter
DBComParamBLUETOOTHA ParamBLUETOOTH; //BLUETOOTH parameter
} DBComInfoA;
typedef struct { //Connection configuration information
DBComType Type; //Communication route
DBComParamTCPW ParamTCP; //TCP communication parameter
DBComParamRS232C ParamRS232C; //RS232C communication parameter
DBComParamBLUETOOTHW ParamBLUETOOTH; //BLUETOOTH parameter
} DBComInfoW;
● Explanation
Structure concerning to connection destination

5-2 DLL Function
2 Initialization of DataBuilder.dll
 DBInit
Initializes DataBuilder.dll.
● Syntax
ret = DBInit(void)
About DLL Function
Value Content Format

Return value
ret TRUE: Initialization success BOOL
FALSE: Initialization failure
● Explanation
5 Initializes DataBuilder.dll.
Make sure to perform DBInit() before using DataBuilder.dll.
DLL Function
● Usage Example
if(!DBInit()){
MessageBox("Initialization failure","Initialization failed ",MB_OK);
return;
}

5-2 DLL Function
3 Connection Control
 DBConnect
Starts communication with KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700.
● Syntax
ret = DBConnect(lpszDestName, PlcId, lphConnect)
About DLL Function

Return value
DB_NOERROR: Normal exit
ret DBERROR
Other than above: Error
See "Error Message Lists"(A-10 page)
This is the pointer of buffer which stores the connection destination
name and terminates with ’\0’.
• In RS-232C
5
Specifies communications port and speed as follows.
DLL Function
"COMx,speed" COMx : Specification of the port No. (1 to 16)
speed : Communication speed
(9600,19200,38400,57600,115200)
Example) "COM1,9600"
• In USB
Specifies as "USB".
• In Ethernet
Specifies with IP address or host name.
"The other end of communication: Port No." The other end of
communication :IP address or host name
Port No.: Port No.
lpszDestName LPCTSTR
Example) "192.168.0.10:8500"
"localhost:8500"
• In Bluetooth
Specifies parameters such as BD address as follows.
"(P1),(P2),(P3),(P4),(P5),(P6)"
P1： Virtual COM port setting value (1-100)
P2： Protocol stack type (0-3)
(* Set 0. When a Bluetooth communication driver of a
Bluetooth dongle manufacture is used, communication with
0 may fail. Please contact the nearest office.)
P3： Automatic/Manual (0: COM automatic, 1: Manual)
P4： Distinguish name (Distinguish name set by "KV STUDIO")
P5： BD address
P6： Passkey (Pass key set by "KV STUDIO")
Example) "1,1,0,KV-5000,00:00:00:00:00:00,1111"

5-2 DLL Function

• In routing setting
Specifies the equipment and route to be routed, equipment to be
connected etc.
"(Basic information setting);
Via,(P01),(P02),(P03),(P04),(P05),(P06),
(P07),(P08),(P09),(P10),(P11)"
Basic information setting: Communication to the equipment to be
About DLL Function
routed
P01: Communication port assigned value
Communication with PLC connected by Serial
DLLTYPE_SERI(1)
Communication with PLC connected by USB
DLLTYPE_USB(2)
Communication with PLC connected by Ethernet
DLLTYPE_IP (4)
5 Communication via VT connected by Serial
DLLTYPE_VTSERI (7)
Communication via VT connected by USB
DLL Function
DLLTYPE_VTUSB (8)
Communication via VT connected by Ethernet
DLLTYPE_VTIP (9)
Communication via DT connected by USB
lpszDestName DLLTYPE_DTUSB (10) LPCTSTR
Communication via KV connected by USB
DLLTYPE_KVUSB (13)
Bluetooth direct-connection with PLC
DLLTYPE_BLUETOOTH(15)
Communication via KV connected by Bluetooth
DLLTYPE_ACL_BLUETOOTH(16)
P02：Communication destination equipment (1: KV-1000/700,2:
KV-5000/3000)
P03：PC-side communications port (2: Ethernet, 3: Serial, 4:
USB, 5: Bluetooth)
P04：Via VT/DT (1: Used, 2: Not used)
P05：VT/DT model(1: DT-100A, 2: VT2, 3: VT3)
P06：Communication method with KV via VT/DT (1: Serial, 2: Via
LM20V)
P07：Via FL-net (1: Used, 2: Not used)
P08：Via EtherNet/IP (1: Used, 2: Not used)
P09：Routing unit No. (0 to 48)
P10：Routing unit name (Same as the routing unit No. 0 to 48)
P11：Routing unit address
Via FL-net: Node No. 1 to 254
Via EtherNet/IP: IP address
Example)"USB;Via,,10,2,4,2,1,1,2,1,0,0,192.168.0.10"
PlcId Connection unit type. Specify PLCID defined by DBPlcDef.h. DBPlcId
When communication succeeds, a connection handle is set. In
lphConnect DBHCONNECT*
subsequent communication, this connection handle is used.
● Explanation
Starts communication with KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700.
• In TCP/IP, When something other than IP address is specified, name resolution is performed for
Local HOSTS and DNS in that order.
• When an error occurs, communication is disconnected. (DBDisconnect() is called internally).
● Related Item
"DBDisconnect"(5-12 page)

5-2 DLL Function
● Usage Example
DBHCONNECT hConnect;
DBERROR err;
//Communication starts
err=DBConnect("USB",DBPLC_DKV5000,&hConnect);
if(DB_NOERROR!=err){
//Processing when an communication error occurs
return;
About DLL Function

}
//Communication stops
DBDisconnect(hConnect);
DLL Function

5-2 DLL Function
 DBDisconnect
Terminates communication with KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700
● Syntax
ret = DBDisconnect( hConnect)

Return value
About DLL Function
DB_NOERROR: Normal termination

ret DBERROR
DB_ERR_INVALID_HANDLE: When the communication
destination indicated by hConnect does not exist
hConnect Connection handle DBHCONNECT
● Explanation
Terminates communication with KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700.
5 ● Related Item
DLL Function
"DBConnect"(5-9 page)
● Usage Example
See "DBConnect"(5-9 page) for usage examples.

5-2 DLL Function
4 Operation Mode/State Control
Acquires or sets the operation mode/state of KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700.

KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 has RUN mode/PROGRAM mode.
 DBChangeMode
Changes the operation mode/state of KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700.
About DLL Function

● Syntax
ret = DBChangeMode(hConnect, Mode)

Return value
ret DBERROR
See "Error Message Lists"(A-10 page). 5
DLL Function
Mode Specifies the mode/state defined by DBMode. DBMode
● Explanation
Changes the operation mode/state of KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700.
● Related Item
"DBQueryMode"(5-14 page)
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
err= DBConnect("USB", DBPLC_DKV5000, &hConnect);
if (DB_NOERROR != err) {
//Error handling
return;
}
//Shifts KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 to RUN mode
err = DBChangeMode(hConnect, DB_MODE_KV700_RUN);
//Error handling
}

5-2 DLL Function
 DBQueryMode
Acquires the operation mode/state of KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700.
● Syntax
ret = DBQueryMode(hConnect, lpMode)

Return value
About DLL Function

ret DBERROR
When terminated normally, the operation mode/state defined by
lpMode DBMode *
DBMode is set.
5 ● Explanation
Acquires the operation mode/state of KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700.
DLL Function
● Related Item
"DBChangeMode"(5-13 page)
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
DBMode Mode;
err= DBConnectA("USB", DBPLC_DKV5000, &hConnect);
//Error handling
return;
}
//Acquires the operation mode of KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700
err = DBQueryMode(hConnect, &Mode);
//Error handling
}
if (DB_MODE_KV700_RUN == Mode) {
//KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 is in RUN mode
m_radio3->SetCheck(BST_CHECKED);
} else if (DB_MODE_KV700_PROG == Mode) {
//KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 is PROGRAM mode
m_radio4->SetCheck(BST_CHECKED);
}

5-2 DLL Function
5 Read/Write to a Device
There are five methods to read a device, and four methods to write to a device.
• Read/write a value in a device.
DBRead()、DBWrite()
• Read/write a value in multiple continuous devices.
DBReadArea()、DBWriteArea()、DBReadLong()、DBWriteLong()
About DLL Function

• Batch read/write to various types of devices.
DBKvReadRandom()、DBKvWriteRandom()
• Read using monitor registration.
DBRegMonitorBit()、DBReadMonitorDataBit()
DBRegMonitorWord()、DBReadMonitorDataWord()
• Read/write text data with the specified device as the beginning.
DBReadText()、DBWriteText()
 DBRead
5
Reads a value in a specified device.
DLL Function
● Syntax
ret = DBRead(hConnect, lpDevInfo)

Return value
ret DBERROR
Set the device type of the device to read in lpDevInfo->wKind in
WORD format, and the device No. in lpDevInfo->dwNo in
DWORD format.
lpDevInfo When terminated normally, the value read in lpDevInfo->lValue is DBDevInfo *
set in LONG format.
See the definition of DBPlcDevice for the device types and No.
which can be set.
● Explanation
Reads one device value.
As for a bit device, the device value is 1 when ON, and 0 when OFF.
● Related Item
"DBWrite"(5-17 page)
"DBReadArea"(5-19 page)
"DBWriteArea"(5-21 page)
"DBReadLong"(5-23 page)
"DBWriteLong"(5-25 page)
"DBKvReadRandom"(5-27 page)
"DBKvWriteRandom"(5-29 page)
"DBKvReadMonitorDataBit"(5-33 page)
"DBKvReadMonitorDataWord"(5-36 page)
"DBReadText"(5-37 page)
"DBWriteText"(5-39 page)

5-2 DLL Function
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
DBDevInfo DevInfo;
//Communication start
//Error handling
About DLL Function
return;
}
//Read the value of DM0
DevInfo.wKind = DKV5000_DM;
DevInfo.dwNo = 0;
err = DBRead(hConnect, &DevInfo);
//Error handling
5 }
return;
//DevInfo.lValue The read value

DLL Function

5-2 DLL Function
 DBWrite
Writes a value to the specified device.
● Syntax
ret = DBWrite(hConnect, lpDevInfo)

Return value
About DLL Function

ret DBERROR
Device information
Set the type of the device to write in lpDevInfo->wKind in WORD
format, the device No. in lpDevInfo->dwNo in DWORD format,
lpDevInfo
and the device value in lpDevInfo->lValue in LONG format.
See the definition of DBPlcDevice for the device types and
const DBDevInfo *
5
device No. which can be set.
DLL Function
● Explanation
Writes a value to the specified device.
• For a bit device, set 1 in lpDevInfo->lValue when ON, and 0 when OFF.
• CTC contact cannot be ON.
● Related Item
"DBRead"(5-15 page)

5-2 DLL Function
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
DBDevInfo DevInfo;
//Error handling
About DLL Function
return;
}
//Writes to DM
DevInfo.wKind = DKV5000_DM;
DevInfo.dwNo = 100;
DevInfo.lValue = 1000;
err = DBWrite(hConnect, &DevInfo);
5 //Error handling
return;
}
DLL Function

5-2 DLL Function
 DBReadArea
Reads continuous devices.
● Syntax
ret = DBReadArea(hConnect, wKind, dwFirstNo, lCount,aDevInfo[])

Return value
About DLL Function

ret DBERROR
Device type
wKind See the definition of DBPlcDevice for the device types which can WORD
be set.
dwFirstNo
Initial device No. of the devices to read
See the definition of DBPlcDevice for the device No. which can DWORD
5
be set.
DLL Function
Number of the devices to read
The maximum number is as follows.
lCount As for bit devices, DB_BITDEV_RW_MAX (16) LONG
As for word/double-word devices, DB_WORDDEV_RW_MAX
(32)
Device information (array)
Secure lCount number's aDevInfo arrays by the caller.
aDevInfo DBDevInfo
When terminated normally, the device type, device No. and read
value is set in an array of aDevinfo.
● Explanation
Reads continuous devices.
• In a bit device, the device value is 1 when ON, and 0 when OFF.
• Use DBKvReadRandom() to batch-read different types of devices or noncontinuous devices.
● Related Item
"DBRead"(5-15 page)

5-2 DLL Function
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
DBDevInfo aDevInfo[10];
//Error handling
About DLL Function
return;
}
//Reads the values of DM0 to DM9
err = DBReadArea(hConnect, DKV5000_DM, 0, 10, aDevInfo);
//Error handling
return;
}
5 //aDevInfo[0].lValue The read value of DM0
//aDevInfo[1].lValue The read value of DM1
DLL Function

5-2 DLL Function
 DBWriteArea
Writes to continuous devices.
● Syntax
ret = DBWriteArea(hConnect, wKind, dwFirstNo, lCount, aDevInfo[])

Return value
About DLL Function

ret DBERROR
Device type
be set.
dwFirstNo
Initial device No. of the devices to write
See the definition of DBPlcDevice for the device Nos. which can DWORD
5
be set.
DLL Function
Number of the devices to write
lCount As for bit devices, DB_BITDEV_RW_MAX (16) LONG
(32)
Set the value to write in aDevInfo[x].lValue.
When x is 0, write aDevInfo[x].lValue to the device whose device
aDevInfo const DBDevInfo
No. is dwFirstNo.
No. is dwFirstNo+1.
● Explanation
Writes to continuous devices.
• For a bit device, set 1 in aDevInfo[x].lValue when ON, and 0 when OFF.
• Use DBKvWriteRandom() to batch-write different types of devices or noncontinuous devices.
● Related Item
"DBRead"(5-15 page)

5-2 DLL Function
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
//Error handling
About DLL Function
return;
}
//Writes a value to DM0 to DM2 (Write 100 to DM0, 200 to DM1 and 300 to DM2)
aDevInfo[0].lValue = 100;
err = DBWriteArea(hConnect, DKV5000_DM, 0, 3, aDevInfo);
5 //Error handling
return;
}
DLL Function

5-2 DLL Function
 DBReadLong
Acquires data through multiple scan, and reads continuous devices up to 8192 words.
● Syntax
ret = DBReadLong(hConnect, wKind, dwFirstNo, lCount,aDevInfo[])

Return value
About DLL Function

ret DBERROR
Device type
be set.
dwFirstNo
Initial device No. of the devices to be read
5
be set.
DLL Function
Number of the devices read
lCount Reads up to DB_DEV_LONG_RW_MAX (8192) of devices LONG
continuously.
Secure ICount number's aDevInfo array by the caller.
aDevInfo DBDevInfo
When terminated normally, the device type, device No. and read
value is set in an array of aDevInfo.
● Explanation
Acquires data through multiple scan, and read continuous devices up to 8192 words.
• In a bit device, the device value is 1 when ON, and 0 when OFF.
• Use DBKvReadRandom() to batch-read different types of devices and noncontinuous devices.
● Related Item
"DBRead"(5-15 page)

5-2 DLL Function
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
//Error handling
About DLL Function
return;
}
//Reads the values of DM0 to DM9
err = DBReadLong(hConnect, DKV5000_DM, 0, 10, aDevInfo);
//Error handling
return;
}
5 //aDevInfo[0].lValue The read value of DM0
DLL Function

5-2 DLL Function
 DBWriteLong
Writes values to devices through multiple scan and up to 8192 continuous devices.
● Syntax
ret = DBWriteLong(hConnect, wKind, dwFirstNo, lCount,const DBDevInfo aDevInfo[])

Return value
About DLL Function

ret DBERROR
Device type
wKind See the definition of DBPlcDevice for the device type which can WORD
be set.
dwFirstNo
Initial device No. of the devices to write
5
be set.
DLL Function
lCount LONG
Writes to up to DB_DEV_LONG_RW_MAX (8192) of devices.
Set the value to write in aDevInfo[x].lValue.
No. is dwFirstNo.
No. is dwFirstNo+1.
● Explanation
Writes values to devices through multiple scan and up to 8192 continuous devices.
• For a bit device, set 1 in aDevInfo[x].lValue when ON, and 0 when OFF.
• Use DBKvWriteRandom() to batch-write to different types of devices and noncontinuous devices.
● Related Item
"DBRead"(5-15 page)

5-2 DLL Function
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
//Error handling
About DLL Function
return;
}
//Writes values to DM0 to DM4095
// (Write 100 to DM0, 200 to DM1, 300 to DM2, ..., 1234 to DM4095)
:
5 aDevInfo[4095].lValue = 1234;
err = DBWriteLong(hConnect, DKV5000_DM, 0, 4096, aDevInfo);
DLL Function
//Error handling
return;
}

5-2 DLL Function
 DBKvReadRandom
Batch-reads different types of devices and noncontinuous devices.
● Syntax
ret = DBKvReadRandom(hConnect, lCount, aDevInfo[])

Return value
About DLL Function

ret DBERROR
Number of the devices to read.
As for bit devices, DB_BITDEV_RW_MAX (16)
lCount
(32)
LONG
5
Sets up to 48 (16 bit devices + 32 word/double-word devices).
DLL Function
Set the device types in aDevInfo[x].wKind, and device Nos. in
aDevInfo[x].dwNo to the device to read.
aDevInfo When terminated normally, the results of reading each device is DBDevInfo
set in aDevInfo[x].lValue.
device Nos. which can be set.
● Explanation
Batch-reads different types of devices and noncontinuous devices.
● Related Item
"DBRead"(5-15 page)

5-2 DLL Function
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
//Error handling
About DLL Function
return;
}
//Reads the values of DM0, DM100 and TM5
aDevInfo[0].wKind = DKV5000_DM;
aDevInfo[0].dwNo = 0;
aDevInfo[2].wKind = DKV5000_TM;
5 aDevInfo[2].dwNo = 5;
err = DBKvReadRandom(hConnect, 3, aDevInfo);
DLL Function
//Error handling
return;
}
//aDevInfo[2].lValue The read value of TM5

5-2 DLL Function
 DBKvWriteRandom
Batch-writes to different types of devices and noncontinuous devices.
● Syntax
ret = DBKvWriteRandom(hConnect, lCount, aDevInfo[]);

Return value
About DLL Function

ret DBERROR
As for bit devices, DB_BITDEV_RW_MAX (16)
lCount As for word/double-word devices, DB_WORDDEV_RW_MAX
(32)
LONG
5
Number of devices to write
DLL Function
Sets up to 48 (16 bit devices + 32 word/double-word devices).
Sets the device types in aDevInfo[x].wKind, device Nos. in
aDevInfo[x].dwNo and device values in aDevInfo[x].lValue to the
device to write.
device Nos. which can be set.
● Explanation
Batch-writes to different types of devices and noncontinuous devices.
• As for a bit device, set 1 in aDevInfo[x].lValue when ON, and 0 when OFF.
● Related Item
"DBRead"(5-15 page)

5-2 DLL Function
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
//Starts communication
//Error handling
About DLL Function
return;
}
//Writes 100 to DM0, 200 to DM100 and 300 to TM5
5 aDevInfo[1].lValue = 200;
aDevInfo[2].wKind = DKV5000_TM;
DLL Function
err = DBKvWriteRandom(hConnect, 3, aDevInfo);
//Error handling
return;
}

5-2 DLL Function
 DBKvRegMonitorBit
Performs monitor registration for a bit device.
● Syntax
ret = DBKvRegMonitorBit(hConnect, byBankNo, lCount,aDevInfo[]);

Return value
About DLL Function

ret DBERROR
Bank No. (0-3)
Can register up to DBKV_MONITOR_DEVICE_MAX (32) in one
byBankNo BYTE
bank. Independent from the bank of monitor registration (word
device).
Specifies the number of devices for which monitors are
5
lCount registered. When 0 is specified, the monitor registration LONG
DLL Function
information is cleared.
Set the device type of the device to be registered in
aDevInfo[x].wKind, and the device No. in aDevInfo[x].dwNo.
The object device type is bit format only. aDevInfo is used to read
a monitor.
● Explanation
Performs monitor registration for a bit device.
• When this function is performed, monitor registration is performed after clearing the monitor
information of the specified bank (Cannot add monitor registration).
• Cannot register two or more banks simultaneously.
● Related Item
"DBKvRegMonitorWord"(5-34 page)

5-2 DLL Function
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
//Error handling
About DLL Function
return;
}
//Performs monitor registration of relay (R)0, timer (T)10 and counter (C)50 for bank 0.
aDevInfo[0].wKind = DKV5000_RLY_B;
aDevInfo[1].wKind = DKV5000_T;
aDevInfo[2].wKind = DKV5000_C;
5 aDevInfo[2].dwNo = 50;
err = DBKvRegMonitorBit(hConnect, 0, 3, aDevInfo);
DLL Function
//Error handling
return;
}
//Reads the monitor (bank 0)
err = DBKvReadMonitorDataBit(hConnect, 0, 3, aDevInfo);
//Error handling
return;
}
//aDevInfo[0].lValue The result of reading relay (R)0
//aDevInfo[1].lValue The result of reading timer (T)10
//aDevInfo[2].lValue The result of reading counter (C)50

5-2 DLL Function
 DBKvReadMonitorDataBit
Reads a device for which monitor registration was done by DBKvRegMonitorBit().
● Syntax
ret = DBKvReadMonitorDataBit(hConnect, byBankNo, lCount,aDevInfo[]);

Return value
About DLL Function

ret DBERROR
Bank No. (0-3)
byBankNo BYTE
Independent from the bank of monitor registration (word device).
5
lCount Specifies the number of devices to read. LONG
Specify aDevInfo used in monitor registration by
DLL Function
DBKvRegMonitorBit()
aDevInfo If different device information is specified, the operation is not DBDevInfo
guaranteed.
When terminated normally, the device value is set in
aDevInfo[x].lValue.
● Explanation
Reads a device for which monitor registration was done by DBKvRegMonitorBit().
• The device value is 1 when ON, and 0 when OFF.
• Cannot read two or more banks simultaneously.
• Cannot read a registered device from the middle of it. Reading is performed from the start registered
in a bank.
● Related Item
"DBKvRegMonitorBit"(5-31 page)
"DBRead"(5-15 page)
● Usage Example
See "DBKvRegMonitorBit"(5-31 page) for usage example.

5-2 DLL Function
 DBKvRegMonitorWord
Performs monitor registration for a word device/double-word device.
● Syntax
ret = DBKvRegMonitorWord(hConnect, byBankNo, lCount,aDevInfo[]);

Return value
About DLL Function

ret DBERROR
Bank No. (0-3)
byBankNo Registers up to DBKV_MONITOR_DEVICE_MAX (32) in a bank. BYTE
Independent from the bank of monitor registration (bit device).
5 lCount
Specifies the number of devices for which monitors are
registered. When 0 is specified, the monitor registration LONG
information is cleared.
DLL Function
Set the device type of the device to be registered in

aDevInfo[x].wKind, and the device No. in aDevInfo[x].dwNo.
The object device type is WORD format only.
See "Device List"(A-4 page) for device types.
● Explanation
Performs monitor registration for a word device/double-word device*.
* Only when timer (T) and counter (C) are set, monitor registration of a double-word device is performed.
● Related Item

5-2 DLL Function
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
//Error handling
About DLL Function

return;
}
//Performs monitor registration of DM0, timer setting value (TS)10 and counter current value (CC)50 in
bank 1
aDevInfo[1].wKind = DKV5000_TS;
aDevInfo[2].wKind = DKV5000_CC;
5
err = DBKvRegMonitorWord(hConnect, 1, 3, aDevInfo);
DLL Function
//Error handling
return;
}
//Reads the monitor (bank1)
err = DBKvReadMonitorDataWord(hConnect, 1, 3, aDevInfo);
//Error handling
return;
}
//aDevInfo[0].lValue The result of reading DM0
//aDevInfo[1].lValue The result of reading timer setting value (TS)10
//aDevInfo[2].lValue The result of reading counter current value (CC)50

5-2 DLL Function
 DBKvReadMonitorDataWord
Reads a device for which a monitor is registered by DBKvRegMonitorWord().
● Syntax
ret = DBKvReadMonitorDataWord(hConnect, byBankNo, lCount,aDevInfo[]);

Return value
About DLL Function

ret DBERROR
Bank No. (0-3)
byBankNo BYTE
Independent from the bank of monitor registration (bit device).
5
lCount Specifies the number of devices to read. LONG
Specifies aDevInfo which is used in monitor registration by
DLL Function
DBKvRegMonitorWord()
aDevInfo When different device information is specified, the operation is DBDevInfo
not guaranteed.
When terminated normally, the device value is set in
aDevInfo[x].lValue.
● Explanation
Reads a device for which a monitor is registered by DBKvRegMonitorWord().
• Cannot read two or more banks simultaneously.
• Cannot read a registered device from the middle of it. Reading is performed from the start registered
in a bank.
● Related Item
"DBRead"(5-15 page)
● Usage Example
See "DBKvRegMonitorWord"(5-34 page) for usage examples.

5-2 DLL Function
 DBReadText
Reads a variable-length character string from a PLC device.
● Syntax
ret = DBReadText(hConnect, wKind, dwFirstNo, lMaxCount, pszText)

Return value
About DLL Function

ret DBERROR
hConnect DBHCONNECT
Device type
wKind See the definition of DBPlcDevice for the device types which can be WORD
set.
dwFirstNo
Initial device No. of the device to read
See the definition of DBPlcDevice for the device No. which can be set.
DWORD
5
DLL Function
Number of the devices to read
lMaxCount A word device can store 2 ASCII characters. LONG
The maximum value to be set is 128 word devices (256 characters).
Character string to read
pszText Secure device size which can store the number of devices in LPSTR
lMaxCount.
● Explanation
Reads the character data stored with the specified device type and device No. as the start. The
readable number of character strings is up to the maximum character string length (word unit) (two
characters of one byte can be read by one word). Reads until the first NULL from the start is confirmed
and stores the read character string. If there is no NULL within the maximum length of a character
string (word unit), the character string added with NULL is stored after reading the maximum length of a
character string.
When a value cannot be converted to a character string, a runtime error occurs.
● Related Item
"DBRead"(5-15 page)

5-2 DLL Function
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
CHAR pszText[256];
//Starst communication
if (!DBInit()) {
return;
}
About DLL Function
// Error handling
return;
}
//Reads text
err=DBReadText(hConnect,DKV5000_DM,0,10,(LPSTR)pszText);
5 // Error handling
return;
}
DLL Function
//Stops communication

5-2 DLL Function
 DBWriteText
Writes a variable-length character string to a PLC device.
● Syntax
ret = DBWriteText(hConnect, wKind, dwFirstNo, lMaxCount, pszText)

Return value
About DLL Function

ret DBERROR
Device type
be set.
dwFirstNo
Initial device No. of the device to write
5
be set.
DLL Function
Maximum number of the devices to which can be written
Stores two ASCII characters by one word device.
Needs a storage space for NULL which is to write at the end of
lMaxCount LONG
the character string.
The maximum value to be set is 128 word devices (256
characters).
pszText Character string to write const LPCSTR
● Explanation
Writes a character string to a device.
• Writes NULL at the end of the character string.
• When the maximum number of devices specified by dwFirstNo + lMaxCount is exceeded, the
function returns an error.
• With the written data which do not have NULL within the maximum length of a character string, it
adds NULL at {(lMaxCount) × 2-1}th character from the start.
• When there is a value which cannot be converted to a character string, a runtime error occurs.
● Related Item
"DBRead"(5-15 page)

5-2 DLL Function
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
// Starts communication
// Error handling
return;
About DLL Function
}
err=DBWriteText(hConnect,DKV5000_DM,10,20,"Sample");
// Error handling
return;
}
5
DLL Function

5-2 DLL Function
6 Alarm
Acquires the alarm information of KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700.
 DBKvGetAlarmLogCount
Acquires the number of alarm logs.
About DLL Function

● Syntax
ret = DBKvGetAlarmLogCount(hConnect, lplCount)

Return value
ret DBERROR
hConnect
Connection handle DBHCONNECT
5
DLL Function
lplCount When terminated normally, the number of alarm logs is set. LONG *
● Explanation
Acquires the number of alarm logs.
By using DBKvGetAlarmLog(), the number of alarm logs is acquired in addition to the logs.
● Related Item
"DBKvGetAlarmLog"(5-42 page)
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
LONG lAlarmLogCount;
//Error handling
return;
}
//Acquires the number of alarm logs
err = DBKvGetAlarmLogCount(hConnect, &lAlarmLogCount);
//Error handling
return;
}
//lAlarmLogCount The number of alarm logs

5-2 DLL Function
 DBKvGetAlarmLog
Acquires all alarm logs.
● Syntax
ret = DBKvGetAlarmLog(hConnect, lpAlarmLog, lplCount)

Return value
About DLL Function

ret DBERROR
Alarm logs. The caller needs to secure a storage area for alarm logs by
declaring as DBKvAlarmLog AlarmLog[DBKV_ALARM_LOG_MAX];
(DBKV_ALARM_LOG_MAX
5 lpAlarmLog
= 64).
When terminated normally, alarm logs are set.
DBKvAlarmLog *
The logs are set from the latest one in lpAlarmLog.

DLL Function
When terminated normally, the number of the logs acquired actually

lplCount LONG *
are set.
● Explanation
Acquires all alarm logs.
• Up to 64 alarm logs are stored in KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700.
• The value of lpAlarmLog->wYear is the actual year - 2000.
(Example) If it is 2010, 10 is set in lpAlarmLog->wYear.
● Related Item
"DBKvGetAlarmLogCount"(5-41 page)
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
LONG lAlarmLogCount;
DBKvAlarmLog aAlarmLog[DBKV_ALARM_LOG_MAX];
//Error handling
return;
}
//Acquires alarm logs
err = DBKvGetAlarmLog(hConnect, aAlarmLog, &lAlarmLogCount);
//Error handling
return;
}
//aAlarmLog[DBKV_ALARM_LOG_MAX] Alarm logs
//lAlarmLogCount The number of alarm logs

5-2 DLL Function
7 Access Functions to a Memory Card
 DBMemoryCardFileCopyFrom
Copies a file on a memory card to a PC's path.
Reference The maximum file size to be copied is 256MB.
About DLL Function

● Syntax
ret = DBMemoryCardFileCopyFrom(hConnect,pszFilePathM,pszFilePathL,dwFlag)

Return value
ret DBERROR
pszFilePathM
Specifies the path of the file to be copied on a memory card.
((IP address)/Set MMC onward)
LPSTR
5
DLL Function
pszFilePathL Specifies the path of a file to be copied to in PC. LPSTR
dwFlag Specifies the operating conditions DWORD
Value for dwFlag
Constant Value Content

Disables overwrite when there is a same name file in the
DB_OVERWRITE_PROTECT 0
copy destination.
Enables overwrite when there is a same name file in the copy
DB_OVERWRITE_ALLOW 1
destination.
Other Incorrect parameter error
● Explanation
Copies a file on a memory card to a PC's path.
* Available only for KV-5500/5000/3000.
● Related Item
"DBMemoryCardFileCopyTo"(5-45 page)

5-2 DLL Function
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
err=DBConnect("192.168.0.10:8500",DBPLC_DKV5000,&hConnect);
// Error handling
return;
About DLL Function
}
//Reads from a memory card
err=DBMemoryCardFileCopyFrom(hConnect,"Sample.csv","C:\test\Sample1.csv",
DB_OVERWRITE_ALLOW);
// Error handling
return;
}
5 //Stops communication
DLL Function

5-2 DLL Function
 DBMemoryCardFileCopyTo
Copies a file on a PC to a memory card 's path.
Reference The maximum file size to be copied is 256MB.
● Syntax
ret = DBMemoryCardFileCopyTo(hConnect,pszFilePathL,pszFilePathM,dwFlag)
About DLL Function

Return value
ret DBERROR
pszFilePathL Specifies the path of the file to be copied on a PC. LPSTR
Specifies the path of the file to be copied to on a memory card.
pszFilePathM LPSTR
dwFlag Specifies the operating condition. DWORD 5
DLL Function
Value for dwFlag

Disables overwrite when there is a same name file in the
DB_OVERWRITE_PROTECT 0
copy destination.
Enables overwrite when there is a same name file in the copy
DB_OVERWRITE_ALLOW　 1
destination.
● Explanation
Copies a file on a PC to a memory card 's path.
● Related Item
"DBMemoryCardFileCopyFrom"(5-43 page)
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
// Error handling
return;
}
//Writes to a memory card
err=DBMemoryCardFileCopyTo(hConnect,"C:\test\Sample.csv","Sample.csv",DB_OVERWRITE_ALLOW)
;
// Error handling
return;
}

5-2 DLL Function
 DBMemoryCardFileState
Acquires a file status on a memory card.
● Syntax
ret = DBMemoryCardFileState(hConnect,pszFilePathM,ptmAccess,
ptmCreate,ptmModify,dwFileSize,bIsDirectory)

About DLL Function
Return value
ret lAxError
Specifies the path of the file whose status is to be acquired
pszFilePathM on a memory card. LPSTR
5
ptmAccess Last access date tm*
ptmCreate Date created tm*
ptmModify Date updated tm*
DLL Function
dwFileSize File size (byte) DWORD*

Directory or file
bIsDirectory BOOL*
(0 - file, 1 - directory)
● Explanation
Acquires a file status on a memory card.
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
struct tm a;
struct tm b;
struct tm c;
DWORD dwFileSize;
BOOL bIsDirectory;
// Error handling
return;
}
//Reads from a memory card
err = DBMemoryCardFileState(hConnect,"Sample.csv",&a,&b,&c,&dwFileSize,&bIsDirectory);
// Error handling
return;
}

5-2 DLL Function
 DBMemoryCardFileDelete
Deletes a file on a memory card.
● Syntax
ret = DBMemoryCardFileDelete(hConnect,pszFilePathM, dwFlag)

Return value
About DLL Function

ret DBERROR
Specifies the path of the file to be deleted on a memory card.
pszFilePathM LPSTR
dwFlag Specifies the operating condition. DWORD
Value for dwFlag

5
DLL Function
Disables deletion when the file to be deleted is
DB_DELETE_EXCEPT_READ_ONLY 3
ReadOnly.
Enables deletion when the file to be deleted is
DB_DELETE_FORCE 2
ReadOnly.
● Explanation
Deletes a file on a memory card.
● Related Item
"DBMemoryCardFileRename"(5-48 page)
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
// Error handling
return;
}
//Deletes from the memory card
err=DBMemoryCardFileDelete(hConnect,"Sample.csv",DB_DELETE_FORCE);
// Error handling
return;
}

5-2 DLL Function
 DBMemoryCardFileRename
Renames a file on a memory card.
● Syntax
ret = DBMemoryCardFileRename(hConnect,pszFilePathM,pszNewFilePathM,dwFlag)

Return value
About DLL Function
ret DBERROR
Specifies the path and file name before modification on a
pszFilePathM memory card. LPSTR
Specifies a file name on a memory card.
pszNewFilePathM LPSTR
5
dwFlag Specifies the operating condition. DWORD
DLL Function
● Explanation
Renames a file on a memory card.
● Related Item
"DBMemoryCardFileDelete"(5-47 page)
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
// Error handling
return;
}
//Rename
err=DBMemoryCardFileRename(hConnect,"Sample.csv","SampleTest.csv");
// Error handling
return;
}

5-2 DLL Function
 DBMemoryCardMakeDirectory
Creates a directory on a memory card.
● Syntax
ret = DBMemoryCardMakeDirectory(hConnect,pszDirectory)

Return value
About DLL Function

ret DBERROR
Specifies the path of a directory to be created on a memory card.
pszDirectory LPSTR
● Explanation
Creates a directory on a memory card.
5
DLL Function
● Related Item
"DBMemoryCardRemoveDirectory"(5-50 page)
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
// Error handling
return;
}
//Creates a directory
err=DBMemoryCardMakeDirectory(hConnect,"SampleDirectory");
// Error handling
return;
}

5-2 DLL Function
 DBMemoryCardRemoveDirectory
Deletes a directory on a memory card.
● Syntax
ret = DBMemoryCardRemoveDirectory(hConnect,pszDirectory,dwFlag)

Return value
About DLL Function
ret DBERROR
Specifies the path of the directory to be deleted on a memory
pszDirectory card. LPSTR
dwFlag Specifies the condition for deletion. DWORD
5 Value for dwFlag

DLL Function
Disables deletion when there is a file/folder in the

DB_DELETE_EMPTY 4
directory to be deleted.
Disables deletion when there is a ReadOnly file/
DB_DELETE_EXCEPT_READ_ONLY 3
folder in the directory to be deleted.
Enables deletion when there is a ReadOnly file/
DB_DELETE_FORCE 2
folder in the directory to be deleted.
● Explanation
Deletes a directory on a memory card.
● Related Item
"DBMemoryCardMakeDirectory"(5-49 page)
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
// Error handling
return;
}
//Deletes a directory
err=DBMemoryCardRemoveDirectory(hConnect,"SampleDirectory",DB_DELETE_EMPTY);
// Error handling
return;
}

5-2 DLL Function
 DBMemoryCardFileCountInDirectory
Acquires the number of files contained in a directory of a memory card.
● Syntax
ret = DBMemoryCardFileCountInDirectory(hConnect,pszDirectory,pwFileCount)

Return value
About DLL Function

ret DBERROR
Specifies the path of the directory to be updated on a memory
pszDirectory card. LPSTR
pwFileCount Number of files WORD*
● Explanation 5
Acquires the number of files contained in a directory of a memory card.
DLL Function
● Related Item
"DBMemoryCardFilesInDirectory"(5-52 page)
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
WORD wFileCount = 0;
// Error handling
return;
}
//Acquires the number of files
err=DBMemoryCardFileCountInDirectory(hConnect,"TEST",&wFileCount);
// Error handling
return;
}
str.Format(_T("The number of files : %d"),wFileCount);
m_Edit2.SetWindowTextA(str);

5-2 DLL Function
 DBMemoryCardFilesInDirectory
Acquires file names contained in a directory of a memory card.
● Syntax
ret = DBMemoryCardFilesInDirectory(hConnect, pszDirectory, wFileCount, ppbyFiles)

Return value
About DLL Function
ret DBERROR
Specifies the path of the directory in which file names are to be
pszDirectory acquired on a memory card. LPSTR
wFileCount Number of files WORD
5 ppbyFiles File name BYTE**
● Explanation
DLL Function
Acquires file names contained in a directory of a memory card.

● Related Item
"DBMemoryCardFileCountInDirectory"(5-51 page)
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
BYTE** ppbyFiles=NULL;
// Error handling
return;
}
ppbyFiles = new BYTE*[1];
ppbyFiles[0] = new BYTE[256];
//Acquires file names in a directory.
err=DBMemoryCardFilesInDirectory(hConnect,"TEST",1,ppbyFiles);
// Error handling
return;
}
str = ppbyFiles[0];
m_Edit2.SetWindowTextA(str);

5-2 DLL Function
 DBMemoryCardSpace
Acquires the space of a memory card.
● Syntax
ret = DBMemoryCardSpace(hConnect,lpdwUpTotal,pdwLowTotal,pdwUpFree,pdwLowFree)

Return value
About DLL Function

ret lAxError
pdwUpTotal Total capacity (upper 32 bits) DWORD*
pdwLowTotal Total capacity (lower 32 bits) DWORD*
pdwUpFree Space (upper 32 bits) DWORD*
pdwLowFree Space (lower 32 bits) DWORD*
5
● Explanation
DLL Function
Acquires the space of a memory card.
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
DWORD a=0;
DWORD b=0;
DWORD c=0;
DWORD d=0;
// Error handling
return;
}
//Acquires the space
err=DBMemoryCardSpace(hConnect,&a,&b,&c,&d);
// Error handling
return;
}

5-2 DLL Function
8 Other Control
 DBSetSystemTime
Sets the built-in clock of KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700.
● Syntax
ret = DBSetSystemTime(hConnect, pTime)
About DLL Function

Return value
ret DBERROR
5 pTime Time DBTime *
DLL Function
● Explanation
Sets the built-in clock of KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700.
• Sets the weekday by automatic calculating from pTime.
• The range can be set from 2000 to 2099.
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
DBTime DBTimeSet;
//Error handling
return;
}
//Time setting 08/18/2010 9:30:00
DBTimeSet.wYear = 2010;
DBTimeSet.wMonth = 8;
DBTimeSet.wDay = 18;
DBTimeSet.wHour = 9;
DBTimeSet.wMinute = 30;
DBTimeSet.wSecond = 0;
err = DBSetSystemTime(hConnect, &DBTimeSet);
//Error handling
return;
}

5-2 DLL Function
 DBQueryType
Inquires the model.
● Syntax
ret = DBQueryType(hConnect, lpType)

Return value
About DLL Function

ret DBERROR
When terminated normally, the model information is set.
For KV-5500
lpType->szName "KV-5500"
For KV-5000
5
For KV-3000
DLL Function
lpType lpType->szName "KV-3000" DBMachineType *
For KV-1000
For KV-700 without expanded memory
lpType->szName “KV-700”
For KV-700 with expanded memory
lpType->szName “KV-700+M”
● Explanation
Inquires the model.
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
DBMachineType DBType;
//Error handling
return;
}
//Inquires the model
err = DBQueryType(hConnect, &DBType);
//Error handling
return;
}

5-2 DLL Function
 DBKvClearError
Clears an error of KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700.
● Syntax
ret = DBKvClearError(hConnect)

Return value
About DLL Function

ret DBERROR
● Explanation
Clears an error of KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700.
5 ● Related Item
DLL Function
"DBKvQueryErrorNumber"(5-57 page)
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
BYTE byError;
//Error handling
return;
}
//Acquires the error No.
err = DBKvQueryErrorNumber(hConnect, &byError);
//Error handling
return;
}
//byError The error No.
//Error clear
err = DBKvClearError(hConnect);
//Error handling
return;
}

5-2 DLL Function
 DBKvQueryErrorNumber
Acquires the error No. of KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700.
● Syntax
ret = DBKvQueryErrorNumber(hConnect, lpbyErrNum)

Return value
About DLL Function

ret DBERROR
When terminated normally, the error No. of KV-5500/5000/3000/
lpbyErrNum BYTE*
1000/700 is set. That is zero when there is no error.
● Explanation 5
Acquires the error No. of KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700.
DLL Function
● Related Item
"DBKvClearError"(5-56 page)
● Usage Example
See the usage example in "DBKvClearError"(5-56 page).

5-2 DLL Function
 DBKvReadComment
Reads a device comment.
● Syntax
ret = DBKvReadComment (hConnect, byDevKind, dwDevNo, lpszComment);

Return value
About DLL Function

ret DBERROR
Device type
byDevKind See "Device List"(A-4 page) for the device types which can BYTE
be set.
5 dwDevNo
Device No.
be set.
DLL Function
Pointer to the buffer in which the device comment is set.

lpszComment LPTSTR
Secure buffer of greater than DB_COMMENT_MAX(33) bytes.
● Explanation
Reads a device comment.
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
DBDevInfo DevInfo;
_TCHAR szComment[DB_COMMENT_MAX];
// Starts communication
// Error handling
return;
}
//Reads the comment of DM0
err = DBKvReadComment(hConnect, DKV5000_DM, 0, szComment);
// Error handling
return;
}
//szComment The read comment of DM0

5-2 DLL Function
 DBConvStrToComInfo
Converts a communication destination character string to a communication setting information structure.
● Syntax
ret = DBConvStrToComInfo(lpszComType, pComInfo)

Return value
About DLL Function

ret DBERROR
lpszComType Pointer to the communication setting information structure (DBComInfo) LPCSTR
Communication destination character string specified in DBConnect().
Secure for up to 257 characters (256 + termination character).
pComInfo DBComInfo*
When terminated normally, the communication destination character
string is set.
5
● Explanation
DLL Function
Converts a communication destination character string to a communication setting information
structure. ComInfo.ParamRS232C.nStation is a reservation.
● Related Item
"DBConvComInfoToStr"(5-60 page)
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
DBComInfo ComInfo;
//Converts a communication destination character string to a communication setting information structure
err = DBConvStrToComInfo("USB", &ComInfo);
//Error handling
return;
}
//In USB
//ComInfo.Type = DBCOMTYPE_USB
//In RS232C
// err = DBConvStrToComInfo("COM1:9600", &ComInfo);
//ComInfo.Type = DBCOMTYPE_RS232C
//ComInfo.ParamRS232C.byComNo = (Port)
//ComInfo.ParamRS232C.BaudRate = (Baudrate)
//In Ethernet
//err = DBConvStrToComInfo("192.168.0.10:8500", &ComInfo);
//ComInfo.Type =DBCOMTYPE_TCP
//ComInfo.ParamTCP.szAddr = (Adress)
//ComInfo.ParamTCP.wPortNo = (Port No.)
//In Bluetooth
//err = DBConvStrToComInfo("40,2,0,KV-5500 ,00:03:7A:4D:C0:43,555ce34b", &ComInfo);
//ComInfo.Type = DBCOMTYPE_BLUETOOTH
//ComInfo.ParamBLUETOOTH.flgManual = (Selecting automatic/manual connection start)
//ComInfo.ParamBLUETOOTH.iComPort = (Virtual port)
//ComInfo.ParamBLUETOOTH.iStackType = (Protocol stack type)
//ComInfo.ParamBLUETOOTH.szBDAddress = (Address)
//ComInfo.ParamBLUETOOTH.szDeviceName = (Distinguish name)
//ComInfo.ParamBLUETOOTH.szPassKey = (Passkey)

5-2 DLL Function
 DBConvComInfoToStr
Converts a communication setting information structure to a communication destination character
string.
● Syntax
ret = DBConvComInfoToStr(pComInfo, lpszComType)

About DLL Function
Return value
ret DBERROR
Communication destination character string specified in
pComInfo DBComInfo*
DBConnect()
Pointer to a communication setting information structure
5 lpszComType
(DBComInfo)
When terminated normally, a communication destination LPCSTR
character sting is set in a communication setting information
DLL Function
structure.
● Explanation
Converts a communication setting information structure to a communication destination character
string.
In RS232C, always specify pComInfo->ParamRS232C.nStation = -1 (Specification of a station No. is a
reservation).
● Related Item
"DBConvStrToComInfo"(5-59 page)
● Usage Example
DBERROR err;
DBComInfo ComInfo;
CHAR szComType[257];
//Converts a communication setting information structure to a communication destination character string
ComInfo.Type = DBCOMTYPE_TCP;
strcpy_s( ComInfo.ParamTCP.szAddr, DB_ADDR_MAX, "192.168.0.10" );
ComInfo.ParamTCP.wPortNo = 8500;
err = DBConvComInfoToStr(&ComInfo, szComType);
//Error handling
return;
}
// szComType "192.168.0.10:8500"

A
Appendices A
Appendices
Device list, error message lists etc. are provided.
1 USB Driver Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

2 Device List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
3 Bit Specification of Word Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
4 Model Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
5 Error Message Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
6 About Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
7 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
- KV COM+ Library User’s Manual - A-1

1 USB Driver Installation
To connect KV series PLC with a PC via USB, it is necessary to install USB driver on the PC. How to
install USB driver is explained below.
Install on Windows 7/Vista
In Windows 7/Vista, USB driver is installed automatically when KV COM+ Library is installed.
"1-3 Software Installation"(1-5 page)
Install on Windows XP
Appendices
Only to connect for the first time, the USB driver for KV series PLC needs to be installed.
Because the second and later connection are recognized automatically, no more USB driver installation
is necessary.
Point Install KV COM+ Library before installing USB driver.

A "1-3 Software Installation"(1-5 page)
USB Driver Installation
Here is the step to install the driver for KV series PLC on Windows XP for the first time. To install the
USB driver of KV COM+ Library, hardware detection must be performed.
Follow the steps below to install the driver.
1 Start Windows XP and log on as a user with an authority to change the system such as
Administrator.
2 Connect the PC with KV series PLC with a USB cable.

A message "New Hardware Detected" is displayed, then "New Hardware Detection Wizard" comes up.
3 Select "Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)" radio button, then click the "Next"
button.
A-2 - KV COM+ Library User’s Manual -

1 USB Driver Installation
4 Select "Search for the best driver in these locations" radio button and check "Include this
location" check box.
Appendices
5 Click "Reference" button to specify the location where KV COM+ Library is installed.
Point By default, KV COM+ Library is installed in "C:¥Program

Files¥KEYENCE¥KVComPlusLB".
A
USB Driver Installation

6 Click "Next" button.
Installation starts.
Point When installation is started, the following dialog box may be displayed. Click "Continue"
button to continue the installation.
The USB driver for KV series PLC has been installed.

2 Device List
The following is the list of devices available in KV COM+ Library.

For the latest information, see " dlluser¥include¥DBPlcDef.h" in the folder where KV COM+ Library is
installed.
Reference Use the device type definition of KV-5000 for KV-5500.
KV-5000 Device type definition

/*KV-5000*/
DKV5000_RLY_B = 0, /* Relay/Input range is 00000 to 99915, the last two digits is 0 to 15 and the first three digits is 000 to 999 */
DKV5000_CR = 10, /* Control relay/Input range is 0000 to 3915, the last two digits is 0 to 15 and the first two digits is 00 to 39 */
DKV5000_T = 7, /* Timer (Contact)/Input range is 0000 to 3999 */
DKV5000_C = 8, /* Counter (Contact)/Input range is 0000 to 3999 */
DKV5000_CTC = 9, /* CTC (Contact)/Input range is 0 to 3 */
DKV5000_MR = 12, /* Internal auxiliary relay/Input range is 00000 to 99915, the last two digits is 00 to 15 and the first three digits is 000 to 999 */
DKV5000_LR = 13, /* Latch relay/Input range is 00000 to 99915, the last two digits is 00 to 15 and the first three digits is 000 to 999 */
DKV5000_B = 45, /* Link relay/Input range is 0000 to 3FFF (hexadecimal), the last one digit is 0 to F and the first three digits is 000 to 3FF */
DKV5000_VB = 46, /* Work relay/Input range is 0000 to 3FFF (hexadecimal), the last one digit is 0 to F and the first three digits is 3FF */
DKV5000_DM_B = 11, /* Data memory (handled in bits)/Input range is 0000000 to 6553415, the last two digits is 00 to 15 and the first five digits is 00000 to 65534 */
DKV5000_EM_B = 14, /* Extended data memory (handled in bits)/Input range is 0000000 to 6553415, the last two digits is 00 to 15 and the first five digits is 00000 to 65534 */
DKV5000_FM_B = 15, /* File register (handled in bits)/Input range is 0000000 to 3276715, the last two digits is 00 to 15 and the first five digits is 00000 to 32767 */
Appendices
DKV5000_ZF_B = 70, /* File register (consecutive number method)) (handled in bits)/Input range is 000000 to 13107115, the last two digits is 00 to 15 and the first six digits is 000000 to
131071 */
DKV5000_W_B = 47, /* Link register (handled in bits)/Input range is 00000 to 3FFFF (hexadecimal), the last one digit is 0 to F and the first four digits is 0000 to 3FFF */
DKV5000_VM_B = 53, /* Work memory (handled in bits)/Input range is 0000000 to 5999915, the last two digits is 00 to 15 and the first five digits is 00000 to 59999 */
DKV5000_DM = 18, /* Data memory/Input range is 00000 to 65534 */
DKV5000_EM = 31, /* Extended data memory/Input range is 00000 to 65534 */
DKV5000_FM = 32, /* File register/Input range is 00000 to 32767 */
DKV5000_ZF = 75, /* File register (consecutive number method))/Input range is 00000 to 131071 */
DKV5000_W = 50, /* Link register/Input range is 0000 to 3FFF (hexadecimal) */
A
DKV5000_RLY_W = 25, /* Relay (00000 to 99900)/Input range is 00000 to 99900 and the last two digits is 00 */
DKV5000_TM = 19, /* Temporary data memory/Input range is 000 to 511 */
DKV5000_TRM = 20, /* Trimmer/Input range is 0 to 7 */
DKV5000_TS = 21, /* Timer (setting value)/Input range is 0000 to 3999 */
DKV5000_TC = 22, /* Timer (current value)/Input range is 0000 to 3999 */
DKV5000_CS = 23, /* Counter (setting value)/Input range is 0000 to 3999 */
Device List
DKV5000_CC = 24, /* Counter (current value)/Input range is 0000 to 3999 */

DKV5000_CTH = 16, /* High-speed counter (current value)/Input range is 0 to 1 */
DKV5000_CTC_W = 17, /* CTC(setting value)/Input range is 0 to 3 */
DKV5000_CM = 29, /* Control memory/Input range is 00000 to 5999 */
DKV5000_CR_W = 30, /* Control relay/Input range is 0000 to 3900 and the last two digits is 00 */
DKV5000_Z = 52, /* Index register/Input range is 1 to 12 */
DKV5000_G = 76, /* Extension unit buffer memory/Input range is 0000000 to 4832767 and the first two digits is the unit No. */
DKV5000_VM = 51, /* Work memory/Input range is 00000 to 59999 */
DKV5000_MR_W = 34, /* Internal auxiliary relay/Input range is 00000 to 99900 and the last two digits is 00 */
DKV5000_LR_W = 35, /* Latch relay/Input range is 00000 to 99900 and the last two digits is 00 */
DKV5000_B_W = 48, /* Link relay/Input range is 0000 to 3FF0 and the last two digits is 0 */
DKV5000_VB_W = 49, /* Work relay/Input range is 0000 to 3FFF, the last one digit is 0 and the first three digits is 000 to 3FF *//
/*KV-5000 (XYM) */
DKV5000XYM_RLY_B = 0, /* Relay/Input range is 00000 to 99915, the last two digits is 00 to 15 and the first three digits is 000 to 999 */
DKV5000XYM_X = 36, /* Input relay/Input range is 0000 to 999F, the last one digit is 0 to F and the first three digits is 000 to 999 */
DKV5000XYM_Y = 37, /* Output relay/Input range is 0000 to 999F, the last one digit is 0 to F and the first three digits is 000 to 999 */
DKV5000XYM_CR = 10, /* Control relay/Input range is 0000 to 3915, the last two digits is 0 to 15 and the first two digits is 00 to 39 */
DKV5000XYM_T = 7, /* Timer (Contact)/Input range is 0000 to 3999 */
DKV5000XYM_C = 8, /* Counter (Contact)/Input range is 0000 to 3999 */
DKV5000XYM_CTC = 9, /* CTC (Contact)/Input range is 0 to 3 */
DKV5000XYM_M = 12, /* Internal auxiliary relay/Input range is 00000 to 15999 */
DKV5000XYM_L = 13, /* Latch relay/Input range is 00000 to 15999 */
DKV5000XYM_B = 45, /* Link relay/Input range is 0000 to 3FFF (hexadecimal), the last one digit is 0 to F and the first three digits is 000 to 3FF */
DKV5000XYM_VB = 46, /* Work relay/Input range is 0000 to 3FFF (hexadecimal) and the last one digit is 0 to F */
DKV5000XYM_D_B = 30, /* Data memory (handled in bits)/Input range is 0000000 to 6553415, the last two digits is 00 to 15 and the first five digits is 00000 to 65534 */
DKV5000XYM_E_B = 14, /* Extended data memory (handled in bits)/Input range is 0000000 to 6553415, the last two digits is 00 to 15 and the first five digits is 00000 to 65534 */
DKV5000XYM_F_B = 15, /* File register (handled in bits)/Input range is 0000000 to 3276715, the last two digits is 00 to 15 and the first five digits is 00000 to 32766 */
DKV5000XYM_ZF_B = 70, /* File register (consecutive number method) (handled in bits)/Input range is 000000 to 13107115, the last two digits is 00 to 15 and the first five digits is
00000 to 131071 */
DKV5000XYM_W_B = 47, /* Link register (handled in bits)/Input range is 00000 to 3FFFF (hexadecimal), the last one digit is 0 to F and the first four digits is 0000 to 3FFF */
DKV5000XYM_VM_B = 53, /* Work memory (handled in bits) */
DKV5000XYM_D = 18, /* Data memory/Input range is 00000 to 65534 */
DKV5000XYM_E = 31, /* Extended data memory/Input range is 00000 to 65534 */
DKV5000XYM_F = 32, /* File register/Input range is 00000 to 32767 */
DKV5000XYM_ZF = 75, /* File register (consecutive number method)/Input range is 000000 to 131071 */
DKV5000XYM_W = 50, /* Link register/Input range is 0000 to 3FFF (hexadecimal) */
DKV5000XYM_RLY_W = 25, /* Relay (00000 to 99900)/Input range is 00000 to 99900 and the last two digits is 00 */
DKV5000XYM_X_W = 38, /* Input relay (0000 to 9990)/Input range is 0000 to 9990 and the last one digit is 0 */
DKV5000XYM_Y_W = 39, /* Output relay (0000 to 9990)/Input range is 0000 to 9990 and the last one digit is 0 */
DKV5000XYM_TM = 19, /* Temporary data memory/Input range is 000 to 511 */
DKV5000XYM_TRM = 20, /* Trimmer/Input range is 0 to 7 */
DKV5000XYM_TS = 21, /* Timer (setting value)/Input range is 0000 to 3999 */
DKV5000XYM_TC = 22, /* Timer (current value)/Input range is 0000 to 3999 */
DKV5000XYM_CS = 23, /* Counter (setting value)/Input range is 0000 to 3999 */
DKV5000XYM_CC = 24, /* Counter (current value)/Input range is 0000 to 3999 */
DKV5000XYM_CTH = 16, /* High-speed counter (current value)/Input range is 0 to 1 */
DKV5000XYM_CTC_W = 17, /* CTC (setting value)/Input range is 0 to 3 */
DKV5000XYM_CM = 29, /* Control memory/Input range is 00000 to 5999 */
DKV5000XYM_CR_W = 100, /* Control relay/Input range is 0000 to 3900 and the last two digits is 00 */
DKV5000XYM_Z = 52, /* Index register/Input range is 1 to 12 */
DKV5000XYM_G = 76, /* Extension unit buffer memory/Input range is 0000000 to 4832767 and the first two digits is the unit No. */
DKV5000XYM_VM = 51, /* Work memory */
DKV5000XYM_M_W = 34, /* Internal auxiliary relay/Input range is 00000 to 15984 and only the values divisible by 16 can be set */
DKV5000XYM_L_W = 35, /* Latch relay/Input range is 00000 to 15984 and only the values divisible by 16 can be set */
DKV5000XYM_B_W = 48, /* Link relay/Input range is 0000 to 3FF0 and the last two digits is 0 */
DKV5000XYM_VB_W = 49, /* Work relay (word) */
} DBPlcDevice;

2 Device List

/*KV-3000*/
DKV3000_RLY_B = 0, /* Relay/Input range is 00000 to 99915, the last two digits is 0 to 15 and the first three digits is 000 to 999 */
DKV3000_CR = 10, /* Control relay/Input range is 0000 to 3915, the last two digits is 0 to 15 and the first two digits is 00 to 39 */
DKV3000_B = 45, /* Link relay/Input range is 0000 to 3FFF (hexadecimal), the last one digit is 0 to F and the first three digits is 000 to 3FF */
DKV3000_VB = 46, /* Work relay */
DKV3000_DM_B = 30, /* Data memory (handled in bits)/Input range is 0000000 to 6553415, the last two digits is 00 to 15 and the first five digits is 00000 to 65534 */
DKV3000_EM_B = 14, /* Extended data memory (handled in bits)/Input range is 0000000 to 6553415, the last two digits is 00 to 15 and the first five digits is 00000 to 65534 */
DKV3000_FM_B = 15, /* File register (handled in bits)/Input range is 0000000 to 3276715, the last two digits is 00 to 15 and the first five digits is 00000 to 32767 */
DKV3000_ZF_B = 70, /* File register (consecutive number method) (handled in bits)/Input range is 000000 to 13107115, the last two digits is 00 to 15 and the first six digits is 000000 to
131071 */
DKV3000_W_B = 47, /* Link register (handled in bits)/Input range is 00000 to 3FFFF (hexadecimal), the last one digit is 0 to F and the first four digits is 0000 to 3FFF */
DKV3000_VM_B = 53, /* Work memory (handled in bits) */
DKV3000_FM = 32, /* File register/Input range is 00000 to 32767 */
DKV3000_ZF = 75, /* File register (consecutive number method)/Input range is 00000 to 131071 */
DKV3000_W = 50, /* Link register/Input range is 0000 to 3FFF (hexadecimal) */
Appendices
DKV3000_CTC_W = 17, /* CTC (setting value)/Input range is 0 to 3 */
DKV3000_G = 76,
DKV3000_VM = 51,
/* Extension unit buffer memory/Input range is 0000000 to 4832767 and the first two digits is the unit No. */
/* Work memory */
DKV3000_MR_W = 34, /* Internal auxiliary relay/Input range is 00000 to 99900 and the last two digits is 00 */
A
DKV3000_B_W = 48, /* Link relay/Input range is 0000 to 3FF0 and the last two digits is 0 */
Device List
DKV3000_VB_W = 49, /* Work relay (word) */
/*KV-3000(XYM) */
DKV3000XYM_RLY_B = 0, /* Relay/Input range is 00000 to 99915, the last two digits is 00 to 15 and the first three digits is 000 to 999 */
DKV3000XYM_X = 36, /* Input relay/Input range is 0000 to 999F, the last one digit is 0 to F and the first three digits is 000 to 999 */
DKV3000XYM_Y = 37, /* Output relay/Input range is 0000 to 999F, the last one digit is 0 to F and the first three digits is 000 to 999 */
DKV3000XYM_CR = 10, /* Control relay/Input range is 0000 to 3915, the last two digits is 0 to 15 and the first two digits is 00 to 39 */
DKV3000XYM_B = 45, /* Link relay/Input range is 0000 to 3FFF (hexadecimal), the last one digit is 0 to F and the first three digits is 000 to 3FF */
DKV3000XYM_VB = 46, /* Work relay */
DKV3000XYM_D_B = 30, /* Data memory (handled in bits)/Input range is 0000000 to 6553415, the last two digits is 00 to 15 and the first five digits is 00000 to 65534 */
DKV3000XYM_E_B = 14, /* Extended data memory (handled in bits)/Input range is 0000000 to 6553415, the last two digits is 00 to 15 and the first five digits is 00000 to 65534 */
DKV3000XYM_F_B = 15, /* File register (handled in bits)/Input range is 0000000 to 3276715, the last two digits is 00 to 15 and the first five digits is 00000 to 32766 */
DKV3000XYM_ZF_B = 70, /* File register (consecutive number method) (handled in bits)/Input range is 000000 to 13107115, the last two digits is 00 to 15 and the first five digits is 00000
to 131071 */
DKV3000XYM_W_B = 47, /* Link register (handled in bits)/Input range is 00000 to 3FFFF (hexadecimal), the last one digit is 0 to F and the first four digits is 0000 to 3FFF */
DKV3000XYM_VM_B = 53, /* Work memory (handled in bits) */
DKV3000XYM_F = 32, /* File register/Input range is 00000 to 32767 */
DKV3000XYM_ZF = 75, /* File register (consecutive number method)/Input range is 000000 to 131071 */
DKV3000XYM_W = 50, /* Link register/Input range is 0000 to 3FFF (hexadecimal) */
DKV3000XYM_CR_W = 100, /* Control relay/Input range is 0000 to 3900, the last two digits is 00 */
DKV3000XYM_G = 76, /* Extension unit buffer memory/Input range is 0000000 to 4832767 and the first two digits is the unit No. */
DKV3000XYM_VM = 51, /* Work memory */
DKV3000XYM_B_W = 48, /* Link relay/Input range is 0000 to 3FF0 and the last two digits is 0 */
DKV3000XYM_VB_W = 49, /* Work relay (word) */
} DBPlcDevice;

2 Device List

/*KV-1000*/
DKV1000_RLY_B = 0, /* Relay/Input range is 00000 to 59915 and the last two digits is 0 to 15 */
DKV1000_CR = 10, /* Control relay/Input range is 0000 to 3915 and the last two digits is 0 to 15 */
DKV1000_DM_B = 30, /* Data memory (handled in bits)/Input range is 0000000 to 6553415 and the last two digits is 0 to 15 */
DKV1000_EM_B = 14, /* Extended data memory (handled in bits)/Input range is 0000000 to 6553415, the last two digits is 00 to 15 and the first five digits
is 00000 to 65534 */
DKV1000_FM_B = 15, /* Extended data memory (handled in bits)/Input range is 0000000 to 3276615, the last two digits is 00 to 15 and the first five digits
is 00000 to 32766 */
DKV1000_FM = 32, /* Extended data memory/Input range is 00000 to 32766 */
Appendices

DKV1000_CTC_W= 17, /* CTC (setting value)/Input range is 0 to 3 */
A
DKV1000_MR_W= 34, /* Internal auxiliary relay/Input range is 00000 to 99900 and the last two digits is 00 */
Device List
/*KV-1000(XYM) */
DKV1000XYM_RLY_B = 0, /* Relay/Input range is 00000 to 59915 and the last two digits is 0 to 15 */
DKV1000XYM_X = 36, /* Input relay/Input range is 0000 to 599F and the last one digit is 0 to F */
DKV1000XYM_Y = 37, /* Output relay/Input range is 0000 to 599F and the last one digit is 0 to F */
DKV1000XYM_CR = 10, /* Control relay/Input range is 0000 to 3915, the last two digits is 0 to 15 */
DKV1000XYM_D_B = 30, /* Data memory (handled in bits)/Input range is 0000000 to 6553415, the last two digits is 00 to 15 and the first five digits
is 00000 to 65534 */
DKV1000XYM_E_B = 14, /* Extended data memory (handled in bits)/Input range is 0000000 to 6553415, the last two digits is 00 to 15 and the first
five digits is 00000 to 65534 */
DKV1000XYM_F_B = 15, /* Extended data memory (handled in bits)/Input range is 0000000 to 3276615, the last two digits is 00 to 15 and the first
five digits is 00000 to 32766 */
DKV1000XYM_F = 32, /* Extended data memory/Input range is 00000 to 32766 */
DKV1000XYM_CR_W = 100, /* Control relay/Input range is 0000 to 3900 and the last two digits is 00 */
} DBPlcDevice;

2 Device List

/*KV-700*/
DKV700_RLY_B = 0, /* Relay/Input range is 00000 to 59915 and the last two digits is 0 to 15 */
DKV700_CR = 10, /* Control relay/Input range is 0000 to 3915 and the last two digits is 0to 15 */
DKV700_DM_B = 30, /* Data memory (handled in bits)/Input range is 0000000 to 3999915 and the last two digits is 0 to 15 */
DKV700_CR_W = 100, /* Control relay (0000 to 3900)/Input range is 0000 to 3900 and the last two digits is 00 */
DKV700_TM = 19, /* Temporary data/Input range is 000 to 511 */
DKV700_CTC_W = 17, /* CTC (setting value)/Input range is 0 to 3 */
} DBPlcDevice;
Appendices
A
Device List

3 Bit Specification of Word Device
In some cases, Word device can be selected or specified as bit device in property page, property, or
method.
For example, when DM is selected, the device No. is displayed as follows.
Most significant bit Least significant bit

DM0000000 15 0
The lower two digits is 00 to 15
DM00000
Appendices
A
Bit Specification of Word Device

4 Model Change
 Operations accompanied with model change

• Change in PLC property of DBCommManager
• Change in CommManager property of DBDeviceManager
• Change in CommManager property of DBRTLoggingManager
• Change in CommManager property of DBTriggerParamDevice
 Devices subject to model change

PLC property . . . . . . . . . . . . .All the devices registered in DBDeviceManager, DBRTLoggingManager,
and DBTriggerManager referring to DBCommManager which changed
PLC property
CommManager property . . . .All the devices registered in DBDeviceManager, DBRTLoggingManager,
and DBTriggerManager which changed CommManager property
Appendices
 Properties of each device after model change
Depending on the types of devices before model change, conversion may fail at model change. The
following shows the properties of each device after model change is completed.
● When conversion succeeded

• Device type (Kind) . . . . . . .Similar device A
• Device No. (No) . . . . . . . . .Same No. *
• ReadValueValid . . . . . . . . .False
Model Change
• ValueRead . . . . . . . . . . . . .0
• ValueWrite . . . . . . . . . . . . .0
* When Nos. do not exist in the model after change result in conversion failure. They may be converted as a
character string.
Example) "0000" -> "00000"
● When conversion failed

• Device type . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 (DB_NODEV)
• Device No. . . . . . . . . . . . . .""(Empty character string)
• IsReadValueValid . . . . . . . .False
• IsReadEnabled . . . . . . . . . .False
• IsWriteEnabled . . . . . . . . . .False
• ValueRead . . . . . . . . . . . . .0
• ValueWrite . . . . . . . . . . . . .0

5 Error Message Lists
The following shows the error message lists of KV COM+ Library.

Error No. is acquired by Err.Number, and error message by Err.Description.
ActiveX
Each object
Error No. Error message Cause Remedy

Because communication
Start communication
0x80040000 Incorrect handle (Connect) is not started,
(Connect).
communication fails.
Appendices
Operation mode is shifted

0x80040001 Program not registered to RUN by SetMode while Transfer Ladder to PLC.
PLC has no Ladder.
Incorrect communication Baudrate settings are Check the settings of
0x80040002
speed specified incorrect baudrate (Peer).
A The specified COM port Check the settings of COM
0x80040003 Incorrect COM port No.
No. is incorrect. port (Peer)
Error Message Lists
SetMode, GetErrorNumber
and ClearError are
Start communication
0x80040004 No connection is made executed without
(Connect).
communication startup
(Connect).
Please set up connection Communication setting is Perform communication
0x80040005
destination (Peer attribute) not completed. setting.
The specified number of
Incorrect number of Check the number of
0x80040006 devices created is not
devices created devices created.
correct.
No CommManager was Target (CommManager) is
0x80040007 Specify CommManager.
assigned. not specified.
No device is registered in Register a device in
0x80040008 No device is held
DBDevices. DBDevices.
ReadAll and WriteAll
Communication stopped. Start communication
0x80040009 cannot be executed while
Access denied. (Connect).
communication is stopped.
The specified device No. is Check the specified device
0x8004000B Incorrect device No.
incorrect. No.
The specified value is
0x8004000C Value out of range Check the specified value.
incorrect.
Writing is done to a timer,
Check whether the
The device was not counter, high-speed
0x8004000D specified device is use in
registered counter or CTC which is
Ladder.
not used in Ladder.
Write protection is enabled
(MEMSW). The setting
0x8004000E Writing prohibited values of timer, counter Cancel write protection.
and CTC cannot be
changed.
CTC (contact) cannot be
CTC device contact cannot CTC (contact) is attempted
0x8004000F turned to ON by
be set. to be turned to ON.
communication command.


The specified device No. is Check the specified device
0x80040010 Incorrect device No.
incorrect. No.
No PLC properties were
Check the settings of PLC
0x80040011 specified for PLC properties are not set.
properties.
CommManager
Check whether the
The index specified by
0x80040012 Index is out of range specified index exceeds
Item is out of range.
the registered number.
Automatic OFF (OneShot)
Only a user defined trigger Set each property of the
0x80040013 was set by a trigger
can be set up specified type of triggers.
different from any trigger.
Set the name of the trigger
The same name already The name of the trigger
0x80040014 (Name) avoiding
Appendices
exists (Name) is duplicate.
duplication.
The name of the trigger is Enter the name of the
0x80040015 No name was entered
not entered. trigger (Name).
A negative value is
0x80040017
Specify 0 or a greater
value for the cycle
specified for the period
Set 0 or a greater value for
the period (IntervalMSec).
A
(IntervalMSec).
Error Message Lists

The cycle (IntervalMSec) is
Set each property of the
0x80040018 No cyclic trigger set by a trigger different
specified type of triggers.
from a cyclic trigger.
Incorrect time range Time range specification is Check the contents of time
0x80040019
specified specification incorrect. specification.
The specified year condition Check the year condition
0x8004001A Incorrect year specified
(Year) is incorrect. (Year).
The specified month
Check the month condition
0x8004001B Incorrect month specified condition (Month) is
(Month).
incorrect.
The specified date condition Check the date condition
0x8004001C Incorrect date specified
(Day) is incorrect. (Day).
The specified hour condition Check the hour condition
0x8004001D Incorrect hour specified
(Hour) is incorrect. (Hour).
The specified minute
Check the minute condition
0x8004001E Incorrect minute specified condition (Minute) is
(Minute).
incorrect.
The specified second
Check the second
0x8004001F Incorrect second specified condition (Second) is
condition (Second).
incorrect.
Each property of the time
trigger is set by a trigger Set each property of the
0x80040020 No time trigger
different from a time specified type of triggers.
trigger.
Though the weekday
condition (DayOfWeek) is Specify the weekday
0x80040021 No weekday is specified.
enabled, that is not condition.
specified.
Each property of the time
range trigger is set by a Set each property of the
0x80040022 No time range trigger
trigger different from a time specified type of triggers.
range trigger.


The same trigger is
0x80040023 Trigger duplicated specified in combination Specify a different trigger.
triggers.
Loop reference. The object is the trigger
Do not specify the trigger
0x80040024 Specification is not which is being set by
which is being set.
possible combination triggers.
Each property of
combination triggers is set Set each property of the
0x80040025 No combination trigger
by a trigger different from specified type of triggers.
combination triggers.
Two triggers are not
0x80040026 No trigger specified specified in combination Specify two triggers.
triggers (AND only).
Appendices
Each property of an any

trigger is set by a trigger Set each property of the
0x80040027 No any trigger
different from an any specified type of triggers.
trigger.
A 0x80040BF4
Failed to initialize specified The value specified by
Specify a value which is
listed in the connection
PLC ID PLC properties is incorrect.
model list.
Error Message Lists
During communication

The number of
The number of Reduce the number of the
connections reaches the
0x800403E8 connections has reached devices communicated
upper limit available for
upper limit with connected devices.
connected devices.
Check the communication
route and communication
Communication port
0x800403E9 Failed to open the port settings of PC. If the port
cannot be opened.
has already been opened,
close the port once.
0x800403EA Timeout error Check the communication
settings of both PC and
Timeout error occurred. connected devices. In an
0x800403EB Timeout environment with a lot of
noise, take measures
against noise.
Failed to open Communication port
0x800403EC settings of PC. If the port
Communication port cannot be opened.
has already been opened,
close the port once.
0x800403EE CAN received Check the communication
0x800403EF NAK received
0x800403F0 Retry over Communication error. connected devices. In an
environment with a lot of
0x800403F1 Retry request noise, take measures
against noise.
The USB port of PC is not Set the USB port of PC to
0x800403F2 USB cannot be used
in usable-state. usable-state.


0x800403F3 Writing to USB failed Check the communication
Communication error. connected devices. In an
0x800403F4 Reading from USB failed environment with a lot of
noise, take measures against
noise.
The host name specified in Check the communication
Host name cannot be
0x800403F5 communication settings is not settings and settings of the
resolved
registered. server.
0x800403F6 Send error Sending failed. Check the communication
Appendices
Cut off from the connected connected devices. In an
0x800403F7 Cut off by counterparty environment with a lot of
device.
noise.
Shutdown the program and
0x800403F8 Initialization failed Initialization of DLL failed.
restart the PC. If the problem
is not solved, reinstallation will
A
be necessary.
Error Message Lists

Communication is stopped by
0x800403FA Cancelled by user Resume communication.
the user's operation.
Reached the upper limit of the Reduce the number of the
0x800403FB Max number of sockets number of sockets available devices communicated with
for connected devices. connected devices.
0x800403FC Serial number error Communication error. connected devices. In an
environment with a lot of
noise.
0x800403FD Other sockets error Error in TCP/IP settings. Check TCP/IP settings of PC.
0x800403FE Incorrect received data length Check the communication
0x800403FF Too short response
0x80040402 Transmission error Communication error. connected devices. In an
0x80040404 Unit error environment with a lot of
0x80040406 A transmission error occurred noise.
An error occurred in route between VT3 and PLC,
0x80040409 PLC com. error occurred communication between VT3 and communication settings
and PLC. of each. And check the
specified device contents.
PLC property of
Do not change the connected
Connecting. PLC cannot be DBCommManager under
0x80040BF5 unit type during
changed communication is attempted
communication.
to be changed.
Switching VT3 unit mode
0x8004138C Mode switching of VT3 failed. Check the state of VT3.
failed
An internal error occurred in
0x8004138D An error of VT3 is detected. Check the state of VT3.
on the side of VT3 unit

Other

Installation information was Installation is not finished Shutdown the program and
0x800407D2
not found properly. reinstall.
Incorrect Serial DLL DLL for serial connection
0x800407D4
version cannot be loaded.
DLL for Ethernet restart the PC. If the
Incorrect Ethernet DLL
0x800407D5 connection cannot be problem is not solved,
version
loaded. reinstallation will be
necessary.
DLL for USB connection
0x800407D6 Incorrect USB DLL version
cannot be loaded.
OS resources of PC are Shutdown the program and
0x800407D7 Insufficient OS resources
Appendices
lacking. restart the PC.

restart the PC. If the
DLL loading or reading DLL used for ActiveX
0x800407D8 problem is not solved,
failed cannot be read properly.
reinstallation will be
A necessary.
The time range of time Check the contents of time
0x80040BC3 Incorrect date and time
Error Message Lists
specification is invalid. specification.

Excel or user program
exception detected.
Unexpected operation may
－ occur. So please save your Shutdown the program and
An exception is detected.
data and restart the restart the PC.
application.
－ Detect exception

DLL
Constant Value Cause Remedy

Normal termination. Not an
DB_NOERROR 0 －
error.
The number of connections Reduce the number of devices
DB_ERR_CONNECT_FULL 1 reaches the upper limit communicated with connected
available for connected devices. devices.
DB_ERR_INVALID_NAME 2 Reserved －
restart the PC. If the problem is
DB_ERR_LOAD_DLL 3 DLL was not read properly.
not solved, reinstallation will be
Appendices
necessary.
Check the communication route
Communication port cannot be and communication settings of
DB_ERR_OPEN_PORT 4
opened properly. PC. If the port has already been
opened, close the port once.
Because communication is not
A
DB_ERR_INVALID_HANDLE 5 Start communication.
started, communication fails.
Error Message Lists

Mode specification of
DB_ERR_INVALID_MODE 6
DBChangeMode() is invalid.
Check the argument.
DB_ERR_PARAM_NOT_FO Not a parameter for KV-5500/
7
R_ KV700 5000/3000/1000/700.
Operation mode is shifted to
DB_ERR_NO_PRG 9 RUN by DBChangeMode() Transfer Ladder to PLC.
while PLC has no Ladder.
The value of an argument of a
DB_ERR_INVALID_PARAM 10
function is incorrect.
An argument of
DB_ERR_INVALID_TIME 11 DBSetSystemTime() is Check the argument.
incorrect.
DB_ERR_INVALID_DEV_CN Specification of the number of
12
T devices is incorrect.
Writing is performed to a device
which is not used in Ladder
DB_ERR_UNREG_DEV 13 Check the specified device.
(timer, counter and high-speed
counter).
DB_ERR_MIXED_DEV_TYP
14 Reserved －
E
DB_ERR_INVALID_DEV_TY Specification of the number of
15 Check the argument.
PE devices is incorrect.
Write protection of Ladder is
enabled. The setting values of
DB_ERR_PROTECT 16 Cancel write protection.
timer, counter and CTC cannot
be changed.
An argument of
DB_ERR_INVALID_DATETI
17 DBSetSystemTime() is Check the argument.
ME
incorrect.
DB_ERR_LOG_RUNWR 18 Reserved －
DB_ERR_LOG_UNREG 19 Reserved －
DB_ERR_LOG_ANOTHER 20 Reserved －


DB_ERR_LOG_RUNNING 21 Reserved －
DB_ERR_LOG_TIMESTAMP 22 Reserved －
DB_ERR_LOG_TRIG 23 Reserved －
DB_ERR_LOG_OVERWRIT
24 Reserved －
E
DB_ERR_LOG_EMPTY 25 Reserved －
DB_ERR_LOG_INVALID_ID 26 Reserved －
DB_ERR_INVALID_BANKN Monitor: Specification of bank
27 Check the argument.
O No. is incorrect.
DB_ERR_MON_ODD_BIT 28 Reserved －
Monitor: Monitor registration is
Appendices
DB_ERR_MON_UNREG 29 Perform monitor registration.

not done.
Monitor: The number of reading
DB_ERR_READ_CNT 30 Check the argument.
is incorrect.
DB_ERR_MON_BANK_CNT 31 Reserved －
A Monitor: The number of
DB_ERR_MON_CNT 32 monitor-registered devices is Check the argument.
incorrect.
Error Message Lists
DB_ERR_ALIAS_OPEN 33 Reserved －
DB_ERR_ALIAS_INVALID_I
34 Reserved －
NFO
DB_ERR_ALIAS_READ 35 Reserved －
DB_ERR_ALIAS_NOT_EXIS
36 Reserved －
T
DB_ERR_ALIAS_MAX 37 Reserved －
DB_ERR_CTH_HAS_NOPR
38 Reserved －
ESET
DB_ERR_CTH_HAS_NOCO
39 Reserved －
NTACT
DB_ERR_CTC_HAS_NOCU
40 Reserved －
RRENT
DB_ERR_CTC_SET_CONT CTC (contact) is attempted to
41
ACT be turned to ON.
Conversion of communication
destination character sting <-> CTC (contact) cannot be turned
communication setting to ON by communication
DB_ERR_INVALID_BAUDR command.
42 information structure.
ATE
Communication speed
specification of RS-232C is
incorrect. Check the argument.
DB_ERR_INVALID_STATIO
43 Reserved －
N
DB_ERR_INVALID_PLCID 44 Reserved －
DB_ERR_SERIALDLL DLL for serial connection Shutdown the program and
45
_VERSION cannot be loaded. restart the PC. When the problem
DB_ERR_ETHERNETDLL DLL for Ethernet connection is not solved, reinstallation is
46 necessary.
_VERSION cannot be loaded.


DB_ERR_USBDLL Shutdown the program and restart
DLL for USB connection cannot
47 the PC. When the problem is not
_VERSION be loaded.
solved, reinstallation is necessary.
OS resources of PC are Shutdown the program and restart
DB_ERR_OS_RESOURCE 48
insufficient. the PC.
DB_ERR_LOG_STOP 49 Reserved －
DB_ERR_LOG_FLAG 50 Reserved －
DB_ERR_LOG_STAMP 51 Reserved －
DB_ERR_LOG_TRIGGER 52 Reserved －
When handling RLY.CR as word,
DB_ERR_INVALID_DEVNO 53 The device No. is incorrect. set the lower two digits of the
device No. to 0.
Appendices
Conversion of communication
DB_ERR_INVALID destination character sting <->
54 communication setting Check the argument.
_COMPORT information structure. Port No. of
RS-232C is incorrect.
DB_ERR_ALIAS
_ALREADY_EXIST
55 Reserved － A
DB_ERR_READ The records may have increased
Error Message Lists

56 Reading alarm records failed. during reading. Perform reading
_ALARMLOG again.
DB_ERR_INVALID_ALIAS
57 Reserved －
_NAME
DB_ERR_CMD_RESP 58 Communication error.
60 Some components of the path are
DB_ERR_INVALID_PATH Check the contents of the path.
(10002) not directories.
61
DB_ERR_FILE_EXIST The specified file already exists. Change the file name.
(10003)
62
DB_ERR_FILE_NOT_EXIST The specified file does not exist. Check the file name and path.
(10004)
63
DB_ERR_IS_DIRECTORY The specified path is the directory. Check the specified path.
(10005)
64 Check the space of the memory
DB_ERR_NO_SPACE Enough space is not available.
(10006) card.
65 Check the file size. A file whose

A file greater than the maximum
DB_ERR_FBIG size is greater than 256MB cannot
(10007) file size is attempted to write.
be copied.
66 Check the read-only setting of the
DB_ERR_READ_ONLY The file is read-only.
(10008) file.
67
DB_ERR_NOT_EMPTY The directory is not empty. Check data in the directory.
(10009)
68 Check whether a memory card is
DB_ERR_NXIO No memory card is equipped.
(10010) equipped.
69 The layer of the directory is too
DB_ERR_DIRNEST_OVER Move the file to a shallower layer.
(10011) deep.
70 Check whether the file is destroyed
DB_ERR_FILE_FORMAT File error.
(10012) or not.
71 Increase the specified size to a
DB_ERR_FILE_SIZE_0 The file size is 0.
(10013) greater value than 0.
* In (), an error code at the time of using DBMemcard object.


• Though the file exists, the
specified operation is not
73 Check the access right to the
DB_ERR_OPEN_FILE permitted.
(10001) directory.
• Writing to the directory is not
permitted.
When the connected device is
Memory card access is
DB_ERR_FCMD_NOT_FOR 74 KV-1000/7000, memory card
attempted to be performed to
_KV700 (10015) functions cannot be used. Check
KV-1000/700.
the connection destination PLC.
DB_ERR_TIMEOUT -1 Timeout error occurred.
DB_ERR_RECEIVE_CAN -2 Communication error.
and communication settings of
DB_ERR_RECEIVE_NAK -3 Communication error. both PC and connected devices.
Appendices
DB_ERR_RETRY_OVER -4 Communication error. In an environment with a lot of

DB_ERR_REQ_RETRY -5 Communication error.
noise.
DB_ERR_TIME_OUT -6 Timeout error occurred.
DB_ERR_OVER_RECEIVE
-7 Reserved
A _LENGTH －
DB_ERR_OVER
-8 Reserved －
_MAXPATHNAME
Error Message Lists

Communication port cannot be and communication settings of
DB_ERR_DONT_OPEN -9
opened. PC. If the port has already been
opened, close the port once.
DB_ERR_OPEN_PTN -10 Reserved －
Communication port is not
DB_ERR_NO_OPENED -11 Start communication.
opened.
DB_ERR_REPS_LESS -12 Reserved －
both PC and connected devices.
DB_ERR_REPS_BUFF -13 Communication error.
In an environment with a lot of
noise.
The USB port of PC is not in Set the USB port of PC to usable-
DB_ERR_USB_OPEN -14
usable-state. state.
DB_ERR_USB_WRITE -15 Communication error. Check the communication route
DB_ERR_USB_READ -16 Communication error.
DB_ERR_RECV_CMDCOD
-17 Communication error. noise, take measures against
E
noise.
DB_ERR_CPU_TYPE -18 Reserved －
DB_ERR_MODEM_BUSY -19 Reserved －
DB_ERR_MODEM_NO_CA
-20 Reserved －
RRIER
DB_ERR_MODEM_NO_DIA
-21 Reserved －
L
* In (), an error code at the time of using DBMemcard object.


DB_ERR_MODEM_NOTFO
-22 Reserved －
UND
DB_ERR_MODEM_OTHER_
-23 Reserved －
ERROR
DB_ERR_RECVSUM_ERR -24 Communication error.
noise.
The host name specified in Check the communication
DB_ERR_IP_UNKNOWN_H
-25 communication settings is not settings and settings of the
OST
registered. server.
Appendices
DB_ERR_IP_SEND -26 Sending failed. Check the communication route
Cut off from the connected In an environment with a lot of
DB_ERR_IP_CLOSE -27
device. noise, take measures against
noise. A
Error Message Lists

restart the PC. When the problem
DB_ERR_IP_INITIALIZE -28 Initialization of DLL failed.
is not solved, reinstallation is
necessary.
DB_ERR_IP_UDP_SIZE -29 －
Communication is stopped by
DB_ERR_IP_CANCEL -30 Resume communication.
the user's operation.
Reaches the upper limit of the Reduce the number of the
DB_ERR_IP_SOCKET_MAX -31 number of sockets available for devices communicated with
connected devices. connected devices.
DB_ERR_IP_SEQUNCE -32 Communication error.
noise.
DB_ERR_IP_TIMEOUT_SE
-33 Reserved －
T
DB_ERR_IP_UNITSEARCH
-34 Reserved －
_MAX
DB_ERR_IP_SOCKET -35 Error in TCP/IP settings. Check TCP/IP settings of PC.
DB_ERR_IP_NO_WINSOCK -36 Reserved －
DB_ERR_DEV_UNINIT 65528 Reserved －
DB_ERR_EXCEPTION 65529 Reserved －
DB_ERR_SEND_CONTENT 65530 Communication error. Check the communication route
DB_ERR_RESP_CONTENT 65531 Communication error. and communication settings of
DB_ERR_RESP_LEN 65532 Communication error. noise, take measures against
noise.
DB_ERR_INTERNAL 65533 Reserved －
DB_ERR_not_implemented 65534 Reserved －

6 About Compatibility
 About installation
It can be installed on a PC with KV COM+ for Excel (KV-DH1E).
 Difference from KV COM+ for Excel (KV-DH1E)

A file created using Excel add-in functions of KV COM+ for Excel cannot be used in KV COM+ Library.
 Difference between different versions of the software

When a user application is created by an older version or later version is run in this version environment
• An application created by an older version is compatible with this version and usable.
• When an application is created with this version or using new functions introduced from this version,
an error occur and the application cannot be run.
• As for an application created by this version, if a later version has compatibility for the application
with older versions, it can be used in the later version.
Appendices
• When an application created by a later version is used in this version, newly added functions cannot
work. If all the functions used in the application are usable in this version, the application can be
used.
A
About Compatibility

7 Index
DBRTLoggingDataCollection
A Object........................................ 4-16, 4-160
About Compatibility .............................. A-20 DBRTLoggingDataValue
About DLL Function ................................5-1 Object........................................ 4-18, 4-166
Access Functions to a Memory Card ....5-43 DBRTLoggingManager Control.............3-31
ActiveX ................................................. A-10 DBRTLoggingManager
ActiveX Control ...................................4-168 Object........................................ 4-13, 4-130
Addition of Trigger Setting.......................3-9 DBTrigger Object .......................... 4-8, 4-93
Alarm.....................................................5-41 DBTriggerManager Control .....................3-8
Appendices ............................................ A-1 DBTriggerManager Object ............ 4-7, 4-84
Object........................................ 4-11, 4-119
B DBTriggerParamDevice
Appendices
Object........................................ 4-12, 4-121
Basic .................................. 3-43, 3-45, 3-50 DBTriggerParamInterval
Before Installation of Object.......................................... 4-9, 4-105
KV COM+ Library....................................1-5 DBTriggerParamLogical
Before Use ..............................................1-1 Object........................................ 4-10, 4-116
Bit Specification of Word Device ............ A-8 DBTriggerParamTimeAt
Object.......................................... 4-9, 4-106
Index
C DBTriggerParamTimeSpan
Object........................................ 4-10, 4-114
Change of Trigger Setting .....................3-21 DBTriggers Object......................... 4-7, 4-87
Communication manager DBValueConverterEx Object...............4-187
Object.......................................... 3-23, 3-32 Deletion of Trigger Setting ....................3-21
Communication Setting ...........................3-3 Details of Properties/Methods/
Configuration and Function .....................2-2 Events ...................................................4-19
Configuration of KV COM+ Library .........2-2 Device ......................................... 3-24, 3-33
Connection Control .................................5-9 Device List.............................................. A-4
Constant, Type and Structure Device Specification..............................3-15
Definition .................................................5-3 Display ........................................ 3-46, 3-51
DLL....................................................... A-15
DLL Function...........................................5-3
D
Data Conversion Function...................4-187 E
DBBarMeter Control..............................3-44
DBBarMeter Object .............................4-169 Error Message Lists ............................. A-10
DBCommandButton Control..................3-42
DBCommandButton Object.................4-168
DBCommManager Control......................3-2
H
DBCommManager Object ............. 4-2, 4-19 How to Set the Path ................................5-2
DBDevice Object........................... 4-6, 4-73 How to Use KV COM+ Library ................2-5
DBDeviceManager Control ...................3-22
DBDeviceManager Object............. 4-4, 4-50
DBDevices Object ......................... 4-5, 4-63 I
DBFanMeter Control .............................3-49
DBFanMeter Object ............................4-170 Include File..............................................5-2
DBMemcardAccess Object ........... 4-3, 4-39 Initialization of DataBuilder.dll .................5-8
DBRTLoggingData Object......... 4-17, 4-162 Install on Windows 7/Vista ..................... A-2
Install on Windows XP ........................... A-2

7 Index
Installation of DLL ...................................5-2

Installation of KV COM+ Library..............1-6 T
Trigger......................................... 3-29, 3-40
L
Link Setting .............................................5-2 U
Lists of Properties/Methods/Events.........4-2 USB Driver Installation ........................... A-2
Use of KV COM+ Library
M (on Visual Basic 2005) ............................2-6
Use of KV COM+ Library
Model Change........................................ A-9 (When Using Visual C++)......................2-38
Use of KV COM+ Library on Access.....2-45
Use of KV COM+ Library on Excel........2-41
Appendices
O Use on a Worksheet..............................2-41
Operation Environment ...........................1-3 Use on User Form.................................2-43
Operation Environment and
System Configuration..............................1-3
Operation Mode/State Control ..............5-13
Other Control.........................................5-54
Index
Overview .................................................1-2
P
PLC Trigger...........................................3-38
Program Creation on Visual Studio.........2-6
Program Example -
Asynchronous Monitor ..........................2-20
Program Example - Device Trigger.......2-28
Program Example -
Switching Operation Mode of
KV Series PLC ........................................2-8
Program Example -
Synchronous Monitor ............................2-14
Programming Technique.........................2-1
Property Method Event ...........................4-1
Property Page Setting Method ................3-1
R
Read/Write to a Device .........................5-15
S
Safety Precautions ................................1-10
Scale ........................................... 3-48, 3-53
Software Installation................................1-5
System Configuration..............................1-4

77 Index
MEMO
Appendices
Index

Revision History
Printing Date Version Details of Revision
Dec 2010 1st version

Sep 2010 2nd version
Jan 2011 3rd version Official release
Mar 2011 4th version
WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS
(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of
one (1) year from the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such mod-
els or samples were used merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to
represent that the Products would necessarily conform to said models or samples. Any Products
found to be defective must be shipped to KEYENCE with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered
to KEYENCE for inspection and examination. Upon examination by KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its
sole option, will refund the purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any Products found
to be defective. This warranty does not apply to any defects resulting from any action of Buyer,
including but not limited to improper installation, improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized
modification, misapplication and mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, cold-
ness, moisture, vibration or outdoors air. Components which wear are not warranted.
(2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products. They are only
suggestions, and it is Buyer's responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyer’s
intended use. KEYENCE will not be responsible for any damages that may result from the use of
the Products.
(3) The Products and any samples ("Products/Samples") supplied to Buyer are not to be used internally
in humans, for human transportation, as safety devices or fail-safe systems, unless their written
specifications state otherwise. Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused
in any way, KEYENCE assumes no responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE
and hold KEYENCE harmless from any liability or damage whatsoever arising out of any misuse of
the Products/Samples.
(4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH NO
OTHER WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL KEYENCE
AND ITS A FFILIATED ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF INFORMATION, LOSS OR INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF
PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS, THE COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS,
SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS, EVEN IF KEYENCE
OR ONE OF ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS ADVISED OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTY’S
CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OR ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some
of the foregoing warranty disclaimers or damage limitations may not apply.
BUYER'S TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS:

If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a third party, Buyer
must provide such third party with a copy of this document, all specifications, manuals, catalogs,
leaflets and written information provided to Buyer pertaining to the Products/Samples.
E1110-2
- KV COM+ Library User’s Manual -

KV COM+ Library Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

KV COM+ Library Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

96118E

Chapter 1 Before Use

KV COM+ Library Ver. 1 Chapter 4 Property Method

User's Manual Chapter 5 DLL Function

Applicable CPU Unit

Manual Name Description

This manual gives information on and operation procedures of KV COM+ Library.

Important Precautions for necessary operations.

Point Precautions for easily mistaken operations.

Pages or other manuals including the related information.

2 - KV COM+ Library User’s Manual -

The chapter describes overview, operating environment

This chapter introduces the installation of DLL and DLL

Device list, error message lists etc. are provided.

- KV COM+ Library User’s Manual - 3

3 Property Page Setting Method

4 － KV COM+ Library User’s Manual －

4 Property Method Event

－ KV COM+ Library User’s Manual － 5

5 About DLL Function

6 － KV COM+ Library User’s Manual －

－ KV COM+ Library User’s Manual － 7

This section describes page components, meaning of symbols, etc.

Headline 2-6 Setting Basic Functions

■Create a new monitor.

3 Click the Set Device tab. Shows points for

of the text and useful

Operation dialog box

2-26 - KV COM+ for Excel User’s Manual -

* KV COM+ for Excel User’ s Manual is used as an example.

8 - KV COM+ Library User’s Manual -

This manual uses the following terminology excluding some instances.

- KV COM+ Library User’s Manual - 9

10 - KV COM+ Library User’s Manual -

The chapter includes overview, operating environment and system

1-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

- KV COM+ Library User’s Manual - 1-1

*) ActiveX control: ActiveX is a technology developed by Microsoft, enables components of different

User application Microsoft Excel

Serial, USB, Ethernet

1-2 - KV COM+ Library User’s Manual -

Operation Environment and System Configuration

- KV COM+ Library User’s Manual - 1-3

KV-5000 Routing setting (FL-net)

(STP/UTP straight cable)

1-4 - KV COM+ Library User’s Manual -

Before Installation of KV COM+ Library 1

● Free Space Available on Hard Disk

● Windows Environment and Installation Directory

● Serial port (RS-232C)

- KV COM+ Library User’s Manual - 1-5

Installation of KV COM+ Library

Turn on the computer to activate Windows.

3 Click “Start” button and enter “e:\setup” in the search box.

4 Click “setup” on the list.

1-6 - KV COM+ Library User’s Manual -

- KV COM+ Library User’s Manual - 1-7

9 Confirm drive name and folder (directory) name to be installed.

1-8 - KV COM+ Library User’s Manual -

- KV COM+ Library User’s Manual - 1-9

● Precautions during communication

● Precautions when using USB

● Precautions for long time use

● Precautions for the rights upon use